Agenda packet — San Carlos City Council, January 12, 2026 (part 3 of 6)

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

G. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:

1. Composite Wood Evaluation - Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, shall be documented to have low formaldehyde emissions which meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins.

H. Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.

I. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Thermal and Acoustic Insulation

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene s hall not be intentionally added in insulation products.

J. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNN ING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium.

B. Hardwood Lumber:

1. Species: Red Alder.

2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn.

3. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 527

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 6

4. For trim items other than base wider than available lumber, use veneered construction.

Do not glue for width.

5. For base wider than available lumber, glue for width. Do not use veneered construction.

6. For rails thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for thickness.

2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Grade: Custom.

B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood or MDF where indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

2.4 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.

B. Type of Construction: Frameless.

C. Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

D. Wood for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Species: Red Alder.

2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn.

3. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

4. Veneer Matching:
a. Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
b. Within Panel Faces: Balance match within panel face. c. Cabinet veneers in each space from a single flitch.

5. Shelving: ¾ inch unless otherwise noted.

E. Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Comp atible species to that indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match.

2. Drawer Subfronts, Backs, and Sides: Solid-hardwood lumber.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

F. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

G. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fr onts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

2.5 WOOD WALL AND CEILING PANELS – FLUSH WOOD PANELING
A. Grade: Premium.

B. Wood Species and Cut:

1. Species: Red Alder.

2. Cut: Rift cut/rift sawn.

C. Veneer Matching Method:

1. Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 528

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 7

2. Within Panel Face: Balance match.

3. Adjacent Veneer Leaves and within Pane l Face: Slip, center-balance, or book match.

D. Vertical Panel-Matching Method: Continuous end match; veneer leaves of upper panels are continuations of veneer leaves of lower panels.

E. Panel Core Construction: Hardwood veneer-core plywood.

1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Finish: Transparent finish
F. Exposed Panel Edges: Inset solid-w ood or wood-veneer matching faces.

2.6 PEGBOARD PANELS AT WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

B. Size: 4’0” by 8’0”.

2.7 WOOD BENCHES
A. Grade: Premium.

B. Wood Species for transparent finish: as indicated on finish schedule C. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): any closed grained hardwood.

D. Trim:

1. Solid wood as indicated.

2. Provide steel framing and trim. Finish as indicated.

E. Adjustable Shelving: Storage Systems as sh own on drawings with hardware indicated.

F. Provide upholstered seat cushion as indicated.

G. Banquette Cushions

1. Seat Cushion:
a. 2.7# density foam with a compression rating of 40.
b. Wrap foam fully in 1/2 oz. Fire retardant treated dacron.

2. Seat Back:
a. 1.8 – 2.0# density foam with a compression rating of 24-28. b. Wrap foam fully in 1/2 oz. Fire retardant treated dacron. c. Include polyethylene moisture barrier at seat cushion backs.

3. Springs: Coil type; copperized steel.

4. Fabric: As listed in the Finish Schedule.

5. Cushion Fabrication:
a. Cover for tight and smooth appearance.
b. Fabricate for tight fit between cushions and adjacent construction. c. Provide boxed edge with luggage stitch seams.
d. Provide heat resistant zipper alon g length of cushion at the backside. e. Fabricate cushion with 3/8 inch MDO plywood backing.

6. Cushions should be removable for cleaning.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 529

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 8

2.8 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
A. Grade: Custom.

B. Closet Shelving: Made from one of t he following material, 3/4 inch thick.

1. MDF with solid-wood edge.

C. Clothes Rods: Chrome-plated steel tubes.

2.9 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of interior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide.

2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provid e materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of in terior architectural woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Recycled Content of MDF and Particleboard : Postconsumer recycled content plus one- half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208. 2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
a. Basis of Design: "Medite" 3/4 inch thick, by Roseburg.

3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard co mplying with requirements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.

5. Hardwood Veneer Plywood: HPVA HP-1, Non- toxic, urea formaldeh yde free: with soy- based adhesive:
a. Basis of Design: Purebond by Columbia Forest Products Inc.

6. Fire Rated Plywood FR plywood where noted: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.
a. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1 1/8 inches and as indicated.

2.10 PRESERVATIVE-TREAT ED-WOOD MATERIALS
A. Preservative-Treated-Wood Materials: Provi de with water-repellent preservative treatment complying with AWPA N1 (dip, spray, flood, or vacuum-pressure treatment).

1. Preservative Chemicals: 3-iodo-2-propy nyl butyl carbamate (IPBC), combined with a compatible EPA-registered insecticide.

2. Use chemical formulations that do no t bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material.

B. Extent of Preservative-Treated Wood Materials: Treat interior architectural woodwork in contact with concrete or masonry.

1. Items fabricated from the following wood species need not be treated:
a. Redwood.
b. Western red cedar.
c. White oak.
d. African mahogany.
e. Honduras mahogany.
f. Ipe.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 530

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 9
g. Dark red meranti.
h. Teak.

2.11 FIRE-RETARDANT-TR EATED WOOD MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood Ma terials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with require ments that are acceptab le to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response char acteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Use treated materials that comply with r equirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colo rants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Produ cts with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.

2. For items indicated to receive a stained, tr ansparent, or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation.

3. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard (MDF) panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achi eve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke- developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Roseburg, Medite FR.

2.12 CABINET HARDWA RE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and acce ssory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Frameless Concealed Hinge s (European Type): BHMA A 156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing, soft-close.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter.

E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 531

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 10

2. ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.

G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

H. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, soft close.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer. a. Type: Full extension.
b. Material: Zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side m ounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated- steel, ball-bearing slides.

3. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1.

4. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

5. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD- 200.

6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100.

7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.

I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

J. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041.

K. Door and Drawer Silenc ers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

L. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.

1. Unframed Glass Doors: Seam ex posed edges seamed before tempering.

M. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Shelves: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3; with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick.

N. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, mol ded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Color: Black.

2. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Doug Mockett & Co, Inc.

O. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: ANSI/BHMA 613 for bronze base; ANSI/BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample.

P. For concealed hardware, prov ide manufacturer's standard fini sh that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Fire-ret ardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

1. Preservative Treatment: Provide softwood lumber treated by pressure process, AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
a. Provide where in contact with concrete or masonry.
b. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 532

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 11
c. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
d. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

2. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Complying with requirements; provide where indicated.

B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-fram ing supports, as recomm ended by metal-framing manufacturer.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or ex pansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galv anized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Titebond Original wood glue by Franklin Internationsl or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Manufacturers not listed but who do o ffer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be cons idered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.

E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.14 FABRICATION
A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

B. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.

C. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

1. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
a. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

D. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

E. Install glass to comply with applicable require ments in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual."

1. For glass in frames, secure glass with removable stops.

2. For exposed glass edges, polish and grind smooth.

F. Core Material:

1. Horizontal surfaces: All hardwood veneer core plywood

2. Vertical Surfaces: All hardwood veneer core plywood or MDF 40 at Contractor’s option.

3. Vertical Surface with flame spread requirements: Fire-Retardant Fiberboard.

4. Doors: Provide solid bearing for hinges.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 533

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 12

2.15 SHOP PRIMING
A. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Opaque Fini sh: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer as specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two c oats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.

2.16 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish interior architectural woodwork with transparent finish at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of interior architectu ral woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Same as item to be finished.

2. Finish: System - 2, precatalyzed lacquer 3, postcatalyzed lacquer or 5, conversion varnish.

3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Appl y wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.

4. Staining: Match Architect's sample.

5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss unit s measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition interior architectural woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing interior ar chitectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble interior architectural woodwork and comp lete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install interior architectural woodwork leve l, plumb, true in line, and without distortion.

1. Shim as required with concealed shims.

2. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 534

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 13
D. Scribe and cut interior architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or dr illed in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4.

F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handl e, store, and install fire-retar dant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

G. Anchor interior architectural woodwork to ancho rs or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure with countersunk, conc ealed fasteners and blind nailing.

2. Use fine finishing nails or finishing scre ws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with interior architectural woodwork.

3. For shop-finished items, use filler ma tching finish of items being installed.

H. Standing and Running Trim:

1. Install with minimum number of joints po ssible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible.

2. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary.

3. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

4. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler; sand smooth; and finish same as wood base if finished.

5. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

3.3 INSTALLATION – WALL AND CEILING PANELS
A. Install paneling level, plumb, true in line, and wi thout distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/ 8 inch in 96 inches. Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 in ch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane.

1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

B. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with blind nailing.

1. Do not use face fastening unless covered by trim.

C. Anchor Modular Wall Panels to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips.

D. Complete finishing work specified in this Se ction to extent not completed at shop or before installation of paneling. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to ex posed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.

E. Refer to Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed paneling.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to ex posed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 535

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 4023 - 14

3.4 INSTALLATION – CABINETS
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidit y conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Proj ect site to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with cabinet surface.

1. For shop-finished items, use filler ma tching finish of items being installed.

D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in li ne to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inchesusing concealed shims.

1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installati on of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

3. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

4. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

3.5 REPAIR
A. Repair damaged and defective interior architec tural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects and to result in interior architectural woodwork being in compliance with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade.

B. Where not possible to repair, replace defective woodwork.

C. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of interior architectural woodwork.

1. Fill nail holes with matc hing filler where exposed.

2. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to ex posed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied.

D. Field Finish: See Section 099123 "Interior Painti ng" for final finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 536

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 1
SECTION 07 2100

BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation.

2. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.

3. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

4. Product Data : For adhesives and sealants used inside the weather proofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials list ed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

5. Product Data : Laboratory test reports for acoustical and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitti ng materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low- Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

6. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD ), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines an d have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demo nstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 537

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 2

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determ ined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Ident ify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Mockups: Install insulation in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive products specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to nec essary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Provide a Product-Specific Type III Environm ental Product Declaration (EPD), that meets the following parameters, and documents that each product's Global Warming Potential (GWP) is at least equal to the Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) BETA Embodied Carbon Baselines dated 2019.11.16 as found on EC3 and as listed below for reference:

2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines:
a. Board – 100 kgCO 2 eq per M2-Rsi/ 9 kgCO2 eq per ft2-R5.68 b. Blanket – 8 kgCO2 eq per M 2-Rsi/ 0.7 kgCO2 eq per ft2-R5.68

3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 538

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 3

4. Declared Units: 1 square meter with thickn ess so that R_SI (average thermal resistance) = 1 m2K/W.

5. Product Category Rules:
a. UL Environment PCR for Building Enve lope Thermal Insulation, v.2, 2018-04-10. b. UL Environment PCR for Calculation Rules for the LCA and Requirements on the Project Report, v3.2, 2018-12-11.
c. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Mineral insulating materials, v1.1, 2018- 12-11.
d. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Calculation Rules for the LCA and Requirements on the Project Report, v1.3, 2014-06-19.

6. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

1. General Emissions Evaluation: Inte rior products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance with California De partment of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure scenario.

D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Ins ulation within the weatherproofing barrier:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene s hall not be intentionally added in insulation products.

F. Foam Insulation:

1. Foam insulation: Provide fire retardants that contain no hexabromocyclododecane (HBCD) flame retardants. Use Polymeric flame retardants (PolyFR) in lieu of these products.

G. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Gl ass-Fiber-Mat Faced: ASTM C 1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II, Class 2.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Atlas ACFoam and EnergyShield
b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. – Polyiso Board Insulation c. GAF – Energyguard NH HD Plus Polyiso
d. Versico – Polyiso Board Insulation

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.

3. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indi cating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 539

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 4
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET ACOUSTIC INSULATION
A. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

1. Acoustic Performance at 1-1/2inch: NRC 0.85

2. Thickness: as required for STC rating indicated.

B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. AFB EVO by Rockwool Inc

2. Owens Corning - Thermafiber UltraBatt FF

3. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer prod ucts that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.

C. Sustainability Requirements: Provide Mineral-Wool Blanket insulation as follows:

1. Recycled Content: Recycled content not less than 70 percent.

2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Pl ate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place.

1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

2. Spindle: Copper-coated, lo w-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0. 016-inch-thick galvanized- steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased sti ffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.

C. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabric ated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 2 inches between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.

D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated cap ability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bon d insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 540

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's wri tten instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-val ue label exposed after insulation is installed.

D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be in sulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

E. Provide sizes to fit applications indica ted and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATI ON FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities form ed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that f ill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the ca vities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by fram ing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs betwe en roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Mineral Wool insulation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 541

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILDING INSULATION 07 2100 - 6

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated fo r sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 542

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 1 SECTION 07 2715

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Self-adhering, vapor-permeable, nonbituminous sheet air barriers.

2. Self-adhering flashing at intersections of air barrier system.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for wall sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration treatments.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that pr ovides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A trans itional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.

C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air- barrier materials and accessories applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review air-barrier requirements and insta llation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 543

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 2

C. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Show locations and extent of air-barrier ma terials, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions.

2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

3. Include details of interfaces with othe r materials that form part of air barrier.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified inst allers and supervisors employed by Installer, who work on Project.

B. Product Certificates: From ai r-barrier manufacturer, certifyi ng compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with air barrier.

C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier asse mbly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employ s installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA accordin g to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.

B. Mockups: Install air barriers in mockups of as semblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive products specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:

1. Provide Mock-up Panel as indicated on drawings and as detailed in Section 01 4000 “Quality Requirements”.
a. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 544

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 3

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barri er within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental condi tions that affect air-barrier performance.

2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensa tion or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate mo vement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air L eakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.

C. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:

1. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.3 NONBITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIER
A. Vapor-Permeable Nonbituminous Sheet: Minimum 20-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of a breathable carrier film or fabric and an adhesive with release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer that complies with VOC limits.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 545

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 4 a. Henry Company; Blueskin VP 160.
b. VaproShield WrapShield SA
c. GCP Perm-a-barrier VPS

2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Puncture Resistance: Minimum 40 lbf; ASTM E 154/E 154M. c. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 15 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A.
d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to ASTM D 4541 as modified by ABAA.
e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Pa sses NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.
f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 150 days according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips , termination strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recomm ended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Ty pe 304, 0.0250 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

D. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer' s standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.

E. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Manufacturer's st andard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths , with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. Pecora Corporation.
d. Tremco Incorporated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates ar e sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

2. Verify that substrates have cured and a ged for minimum time recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 546

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 5

3. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrates for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrat e and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-fre e, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-releas e agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other pr ojections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.

E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic bead s at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smoot h transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechan ically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

H. Bridge isolation joints expansion joints and di scontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to- deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufac turer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.

1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

2. Do not apply to wet substrates.

3. Do not allow contamination with dust or dirt.

4. Seal completely at edges, perimeter, and penetrations B. Prepare, treat, and seal inside and outside co rners and vertical and hori zontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations with termination mastic.

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and a llow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier sheet on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheat hing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 547

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 6 D. Apply and firmly adhere air-bar rier sheets over area to receive air barrier. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation.

1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water.

2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.

E. Apply continuous air-barrier sheets over accessory strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

F. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air-barri er sheet with an additional 6-inch-wide, transition strip.

G. Seal exposed edges of sheet at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

H. Install air-barrier sheet and accessory materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.

1. Coordinate air-barrier installation with in stallation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install transition strip on roofing membr ane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

I. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier s heet continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framin g, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

J. At end of each working day, seal top edge of ai r-barrier material to substrate with termination mastic.

K. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-ba rrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufac turer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

L. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of doors. Apply preformed silicone extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of covera ge is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of contact over firm bearing to perimet er frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

1. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier material.

M. Wall Openings Transition Assembly Installation: Apply opening transition assembly so that a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) of coverage is achieved over adjacent sheathing board substrate.

1. Apply window manufacturer's recommended silicone joint sealant bedding bead to aluminum frame and mechanically attach transition assembly aluminum race to aluminum frame.

2. Embed transition assembly in continuous application of fluid-applied flashing on sheathing board surface.

N. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of wind ows, doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air- barrier material with foam sealant.

O. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped s eams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air-barrier sheet ex tending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 548

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 7 P. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.

Q. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testi ng agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessorie s, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:

1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes.

2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.

3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings.

4. Site conditions for application temperat ure and dryness of substrates have been maintained.

5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.

6. Surfaces have been primed.

7. Laps in sheet materials have complied with the minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or ma stic applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.

9. Air barrier has been firmly adhered to substrate.

10. Compatible materials have been used.

11. Transitions at changes in direction and st ructural support at gaps have been provided.

12. Connections between assemblies (air barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface prepa ration and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.

13. All penetrations have been sealed.

C. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:

1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies w ill be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers.

2. Air-Leakage-Volume Testing: Air-barrier as semblies will be tested for air-leakage rate according to ASTM E 783 or ASTM E 2357.

3. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies w ill be tested for required adhesion to substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof.

D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, acco rding to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by test ing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 549

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07 2715 - 8

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air- barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with inco mpatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from constructi on that would be exposed in the completed Work, using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 550

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 1

SECTION 07 5113

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, COLD APPLIED
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Cold-applied built-up asphalt roofing system on metal and concrete decks including but not limited to:
a. Substrate board (metal deck).
b. Vapor retarder.
c. Roof insulation.
d. Roof insulation cover board.
e. Roofing membrane ply sheets.
f. Base flashings.
g. Walkway material.

B. Section includes the installation of sound-absorb ing insulation strips in ribs of roof deck. Sound- absorbing insulation strips are furnished under Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking." C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpent ry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking, and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.

2. Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for wood-bas ed, structural-use roof deck panels.

3. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.

4. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings.

5. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 "S tandard Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing" and glossary in applicable edi tion of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual:

Membrane Roof Systems" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insu rer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or a ffects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review drawings and specifications.

3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Review and finalize construction schedule and ve rify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 551

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 2

5. Examine substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing.

8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing during and after installation.

10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

11. Contractor to minimize work done over co mpleted roofing system. Any work done over completed roofing system must include temporary protection of the roof.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM Approvals' RoofNav listing.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Product Test Reports : For roof materials, documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system, include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide roof plan showing orientation and types of roof deck, orientation of membrane roofing, and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened components.

1. Base flashings and built-up terminations.
a. Indicate that details meet requirements of this Section.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.

4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

5. Membrane fastening or adhesion requirements.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing materials, of co lor specified for exposed material.

2. Walkway materials.

3. Metal termination bars.

E. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofi ng system indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements for each zone of the roof (field, perimeter and corners)

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 552

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 3

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installe r manufacturer and testing agency.

1. Include letter from Manufacturer written for th is Project indicating approval of Installer.

B. Contractor's Product Certific ate: Submit notarized certificate, indicating products intended for Work of this Section, including product nam es and numbers and manufacturers' names, with statement indicating that products to be prov ided meet the requireme nts of the Contract Documents.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of built-up roofing.

D. Warranties: Unexecuted sample copies of special warranties.

E. Field Quality Control Reports: Reports of Roofing Inspector. Include weather conditions, description of work performed, tests performed, defective work observed, and Contractor's corrective actions taken to correct defective work.

1. Submit reports within 48 hours after inspection

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.

B. Warranties: Executed copies of warranties.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of worker s trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experience installing similar work, able to communicate verbally with Contractor , Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to furnish warranty of type specified.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacture r that is listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for roofing system identical to t hat used for this Project. Approved manufacturer with UL listed roofing systems comparable to those specified for this Project, with minimum five years' experience in manufacture of comparable products in successful use in similar applications, and able to furnish warranty with provisions matching specified requirements.

C. Approval of Comparable Product s: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review:

1. Product data, including certified independ ent test data indicating compliance with requirements.

2. Samples of each component.

3. Sample submittal from similar project.

4. Project references: Minimum of five installa tions of specified products not less than five years old, with Owner and Architect contact information.

5. Sample warranty.

6. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as st ipulated in Division 01 General Requirements.

D. Roofing Inspector Qualifications: A technical representative of manufacturer, not engaged in the sale of products, and experienced in the insta llation and maintenance of the specified roofing system, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article to determine Installer's compliance wi th the requirements of this Project, and approved

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 553

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 4

by the manufacturer to issue warranty certificat ion. The Roofing Inspector shall be one of the following:

1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer.

2. An independent party certified as a Regist ered Roof Observer by the Roof Consultants Institute, retained by the Contractor or the Manufacturer and approved by the Manufacturer.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand nam e and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dr y, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing manufacturer.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from phy sical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources.

1. Store in a dry location.

2. Comply with insulation manufacturer's wri tten instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and pl ace equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.

1.10 PROJECT / FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed accord ing to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of r oofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing and insulation with a course of roofing sheet securely in place with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.

3. Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.

4. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Roof System Manufac turer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofi ng system that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period, as follows.

1. Form of Warranty: Manufactu rer's standard warranty form.

2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Sect ion and including sheet metal details and termination details installed by the roof sy stem Installer and approved by the Roof System Manufacturer.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 554

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 5

3. Warranty Period: 20 years from dat e of completion, no dollar limit.

B. Manufacturer Inspection Services: By manufac turer's technical representative, to report maintenance responsibilities to Owner necessary for preservation of Owner's warranty rights.

The cost of manufacturer's inspections is included in the Contract Sum.

1. Inspections to occur in following ye ars: 2, 5, 10, 15 following completion.

C. Installer Warranty: Installer's wa rranty signed by Installer, as follows.

1. Form of Warranty: Form acceptable to Roofing Manufacturer and Owner.

2. Scope of Warranty: Work of this Section.

3. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall re sist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746/C3746M, ASTM D4272/D4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and appl ication required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualifi ed testing agency to resist the uplift pressures indicated on drawings.

D. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897: as indicated on drawings.

E. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

F. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

G. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

H. Roofing:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 555

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 6

1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) – Low slope: Three-year-aged SRI not less than 64 or initial SRI not less than 82 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

2. ENERGY STAR Listing: Roofing system s hall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.

I. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

J. Flashings and Fastening: Provide base flas hings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials and installation techniques that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following:

1. NRCA Roofing Manual (Sixth Edition) fo r construction details and recommendations.

2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Seventh Edition) for construction details.

3. Comply with requirements of Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".

K. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency.

1. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

L. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.

1. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Ply Sheets:

1. SBS-modified asphalt coated composite polye ster / fiberglass/fiberglass mat reinforced high tensile strength base sheet, ASTM D4601 Type II.

B. Membrane Flashing Sheets:

1. Flashing Sheet, Thermoset: Elastomeric polyester reinforced sheet with EPDM and SBR elastomers.

C. Detailing Fabric:

1. Woven Glass Fiber Mesh, Vinyl-Coated: N on-shrinking, non-rotting, vinyl-coated woven glass mesh for reinforcing flashing seams, membrane laps, and other roof system detailing.

2.3 COLD-APPLIED ADHESIVE MATERIALS
A. General: Adhesive and sealant materials recommended by roofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall co mply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Asphalt Primer:

1. Asphalt primer, Solvent-based.

C. Ply Sheet Adhesive:

1. Cold-applied roofing adhesive and surfacer , one-part, formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 556

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 7

D. Flashing Sheet Adhesive:

1. Bonding and Flashing Adhesive, SEBS/SIS m odified asphalt, for elastomeric flashing membranes.

E. Flashing Sheet Adhesive Primer:

1. Primer for Flashing Adhesive, primer to promote adhesion coatings on single-ply membrane flashings.

2.4 AUXILIARY BUILT-UP ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing membrane.

B. Stripping Reinforcing Fabric:

1. Polyester Reinforcing and Protection Fabr ic: 100 percent stitch-bonded mildew-resistant polyester fabric intended for reinforcement of compatible fluid-applied membranes and flashings and as a protection layer under pavers or stone aggregates.

C. Elastomeric Mastic:

1. Roofing Mastic, Low-Volatile: Modified asphal t elastomeric roof mastic, one-part, trowel- grade, formulated for compat ibility and use with specif ied roofing membranes and flashings.

D. Stripping Adhesive / Sealer:

1. Seam Sealer: Aromatic polyurethane seal er, single-component, high solids, moisture curing, formulated for compatibility and use wi th a variety of roofing and flashing substrates.

E. Joint Sealant: Elastomeric joint sealant compat ible with roofing materials, with movement capability appropriate for application.

1. Joint Sealant, Polyurethane: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 single-component moisture curing sealant, formulated for compatibility and use in dynamic and static joints; paintable.

F. Fasteners: Factory-c oated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening built-up roofing components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for requir ed pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

G. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide misc ellaneous accessories recommended by built-up roofing manufacturer.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Vapor Retarder Membrane:

1. SBS-modified asphalt coated composite polye ster / fiberglass/fiberglass mat reinforced high tensile strength base sheet, ASTM D4601 Type II.

B. Vapor Retarder Adhesive:

1. Cold-applied roofing adhesive and surfacer , one-part, formulated for compatibility and use with specified roofing membranes and flashings.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 557

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 8

C. Vapor Retarder Primer (Concrete deck):

1. Asphalt primer, water-based, polymer modified.

D. Sheathing Paper at CLT decks: Re d-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).

2.6 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by PVC roof membrane manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assemblies.

B. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roof membrane manufacturer.

1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, t apered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated, not less than two times the roof slope.

C. Roof Insulation:

1. Board Insulation, Polyisocyanurate: CFC- and HCFC- free, with recycled content glass- fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1. a. Compressive Strength, ASTM C1621: Grade 2: 20 psi (138 kPa). b. Conditioned Thermal Resistance at 75 deg. F (24 deg. C): 14.4 at 2.5 inches (50.8 mm) thick.

D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insu lation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing system components.

B. Fasteners: Factory-c oated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover board to substrate and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive.

D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board.

E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."
F. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, wa ter-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. USG Corporation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 558

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 9

G. Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch-wide, coated, glass fiber.

2.8 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Material:

1. Solid-rubber surface-textured slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations ar e in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. wood cants

3. CLT and Steel Roof Deck:
a. Verify that surface plane flatness and fa stening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."
b. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) out of plane relative to adjoining
deck.

4. Concrete Roof Deck:
a. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing manufacturer has passed.
b. Verify that concrete substrate is visibl y dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM F 2170. c. Verify that concrete curing compound s that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prevent materials from enteri ng and clogging roof dr ains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.

C. Concrete Surface Priming: Prime surface of c oncrete deck with asphalt primer at rate required by manufacturer and allow primer to dry.

D. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's recommendations at CLT decks.

1. Submit test result within 24 hours of performing tests. a. Include manufacturer's requirements fo r any revision to previously submitted fastener patterns required to achieve specified wind uplift requirements.

E. Acoustical Steel Deck Insulation: Install acoust ical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking," according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions, immediately before installation of overlying construction and to remain dry.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 559

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 10

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system accord ing to roofing system manufactu rer's written instructions, FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

B. Install roofing system in accordance with m anufacturer’s written instructions, approved shop drawings, and Contract Documents.

C. Install wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers in accordance with requirements of Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

3.4 ROOFING INSTALLATION DETAILS
A. NRCA Installation Details: Inst all roofing system in accordance with applicable NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA recommendations; modify as required to comply with manufacturer's approved details.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
A. Vapor Retarder Installation, General: Completely seal vapor retarder/air barrier at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system. Seal vapor retarder/air barrier to air barrier in adjacent construction at perimeter of roofing system.

B. SBS Modified Sheet Vapor Retarder: Install one lapped vapor retarder course and adhere in a uniform coating of cold-applied adhesive, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Vapor barrier not to be used as a temporary roof membrane.

3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Comply with built-up roofing manufacturer's wri tten instructions for installing roof insulation.

B. Coordinate installing membra ne roofing system com ponents so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

C. Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degre e cant strips at junctures of built-up roofing with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.

D. Tapered Insulation and Crickets: Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

1. Where crickets are indicated or required to provide positive slope to drain, make slope of crickets minimum of two times the roof slope and not less than 1/4 inch in 12 inches.

E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4
inch (6 mm) with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

F. Install insulation under area of roofing to ac hieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 560

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 11

1. Tapered Insulation System for Flat Roof Deck: Install insulation as follows:
a. Minimum total thickness of Continuous Insulation:. 5.2 inches b. Minimum Continuous Insulation R-value: Not less than. 30

2. Insulation Drain Sumps: Tapered insulation sumps, not less than 2 by 2 feet, sloped to roof drain, with a minimum insulation thickness of not less than one inch less than the Project-stipulated continuous insulation thickness based upon code requirements.

G. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

H. Install tapered edge strips at per imeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

I. Adhered Insulation Application Method: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Prime substrate with primer as recommended by manufacturer and allow to dry.

2. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

J. Cover Board Installation: Install cover boards ov er insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered betwe en rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of
6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together. Tape joints if required by roofing manufacturer.

1. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining cover in place.

3.7 COLD-APPLIED BUILT-UP R OOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations in NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing" and as follows:

1. Number of Ply Sheets: Four.
a. Adhering Method: Cold-applied adhesive.

B. Start installation of built-up roofing in pr esence of manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Cooperate with testing agencies and personnel engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing.

D. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's wo rk configured as recommended by NRCA Roofing Manual Appendix: Quality Control Guidelines - Insulation to protect new roofing.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.

3. Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.

4. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

E. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging built-u p roofing components or adjacent building construction.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 561

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 12

3.8 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install lapped base-ply sheet according to roofin g manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:

1. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.

B. Ply Sheets: Install ply sheets starting at low poin t of roofing. Align ply sh eets without stretching.

Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in dire ction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants.

1. Embed each ply sheet in cold-applied membrane adhesive applied at rate required by roofing manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching.

3.9 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and ot her sloping and vertical surf aces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to su bstrates according to built-up roofing manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) above
built-up roofing and 6 inches (150 mm) onto field of built-up roofing.

2. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by built-up roofing manufacturer.

3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.

Apply cold-applied flashing sheet adhesive to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing manufacturer. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
a. Flashing Sheet Top Termination: Mechanica lly fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
1) Seal top termination of base flashing with a metal termination bar. b. Flashing Sheet Bottom Termination: Adhe re flashing sheet to roofing membrane in continuous bed of cold-applied adhesive.
1) Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Heat weld vertical flashing joints. Seal bottom termination of base flashing by adhering to roofing membrane with cold- applied adhesive and sealing flashing-to-membrane joint with joint sealant.

B. Install stripping, according to roofing manufac turer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing.

C. Flashing-Sheet Stripping: Install flashing- sheet stripping in a continuous coating of manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, and extend onto roofing membrane. Apply number of courses recommended by manufacturer.

D. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch (760-by-7 60-mm) metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed built-up roofing. Cover metal flashing with built-up roofing cap-sheet stripping and extend a minimum of 6 inches ( 150 mm) beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of built-up roofing. Clamp built-up roofing, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.

1. Install flashing sheet stripping according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkways, General: Install walkways according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install walkways at following locations:
a. Where indicated on Drawings.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 562

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 13

B. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Set walkway pads in cold-applied adhesive.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's representative to be on site daily and the entire time roofing work is being performed.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing age ncy to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.

C. Perform the following tests:
a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed. b. After testing, repair leak s, repeat tests, and make fu rther repairs until roofing and flashing installations are watertight.
1) Cost of retesting is C ontractor's responsibility.
c. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of entrapped moisture, if any.

2. Low-Voltage Electrical Conductance Testing: Testing agency shall survey entire roof area and flashings to locate discontinuity in the roof membrane using an exposed metal electrical loop to create an electrical field tested with hand-held probes or a scanning platform having integral perimeter electrical loops creating a complete electrical field. a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed. b. After testing, repair areas of discontinuities, repeat test s, and make further repairs until roofing and flashing installations are contiguous. 1) Cost of retesting is C ontractor's responsibility.
c. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of initial discontinuities, if any.

D. Test Cuts: Remove test specimens to ev aluate problems observed during quality-assurance inspections of roofing system as follows:

1. Determine approximate quantities of comp onents within roofing system according to ASTM D3617/D3617M.

2. Examine test specimens for interply voids according to ASTM D3617/D3617M and to comply with criteria established in Appendix 3 in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."

3. Repair areas where test cuts were made according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Roofing Inspector: Contractor shall engage a qu alified roofing inspector full-time on site to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepar e start up, interim, and final reports. Roofing Inspector's quality assurance inspections shall comply with criteria established in NRCA's "Quality Control and Quality-assurance Guidelin es for the Application of Membrane Roofing Systems."
F. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing syste m manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation at commencement and upon completion.

1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

G. Repair or remove and replace components of bu ilt-up roofing where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contra ctor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 563

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07 5113 - 14

H. A third party infra-red roof scan shall be comp leted at the completion of the job and 10 months after the completion in order to verify the integrity of the roof system.

3.12 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and we ar during remainder of construction period.

1. When remaining construction does not affe ct or endanger roofing, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nat ure and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing co mponents that do not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofi ng to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 564

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1
SECTION 07 6200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.

2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpent ry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim la yout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim insta llation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review construction schedule. Verify av ailability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drain age, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insuranc e and certificates if applicable.

4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 565

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2

C. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

4. Include details for forming, includi ng profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.

7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.

8. Include details of r oof-penetration flashing.

9. Include details of edge conditions, includi ng eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable.

10. Include details of special conditions.

11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory- applied finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: Fo r each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by ac tual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Join ts, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved.

C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For copings and roof edge fl ashing, from an agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction showing compliance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 566

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 3

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled wo rkers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Install sheet metal flashing and trim in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive products specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materi als in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet me tal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessar y for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim asse mblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Me tal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Recycled Content of Steel-S heet Flashing and Trim: Postconsum er recycled content plus one- half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 567

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 4
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal mo vements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrime ntal effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

F. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

G. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

H. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section when available.

1. Environmental product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients –Docum entation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Finish: ASTM A480/A480M, No. 2D (dull, cold rolled).

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226 /D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimu m 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a la yer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide prim er according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, provide Henry Company ; Blueskin PE200 HT, or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn.Ultra c. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.
d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 568

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 5

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fast eners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded na ils, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching colo r of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

2. Fasteners for Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sens itive, 100 percent solids, polyiso butylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for ho oked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied aspha lt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to co mpliance with requirements, provide products by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
c. Hickman Company, W. P.
d. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
e. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick.

3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slott ed holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing wa shers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 569

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 6

4. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fasteni ng flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials.

5. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to c oncrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.

6. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.

7. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resili ent plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.

8. Finish: Mill.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of it em required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

3. Obtain field measurements for accu rate fit before shop fabrication.

4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fi t substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, leve ls, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisio ns where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim t hat is capable of installation to tolerances specified.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for ther mal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hoo ked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-ty pe joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevent ion Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

F. Seams:

1. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock s eams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 570

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 7

2. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock s eams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion sp ace and 6-inch-wide, exposed cover plate.

2. Fabricate with scuppers spaced 10 feet apart, to dimensions required with 4-inch-wide flanges and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.

Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
a. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exte rior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and ex terior corners. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabric ate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, sm ooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barrier s have been installed ov er sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 571

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 8

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet Underlayment:

1. Install self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment; wrinkle free.

2. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

3. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures.

4. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses.

5. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller.

6. Roll laps and edges with roller.

7. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Install slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlaym ent before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water.

2. Lapp joints not less than 4 inches.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structur al movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

3. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

4. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

5. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apar t. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

6. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and tr im with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks.

7. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

8. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive subs trates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hoo ked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener size s that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 572

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 9
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and s eal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.

When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures . Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/ 2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre- tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder metallic-coa ted steel and aluminum sheet.

2. Do not use torches for soldering.

3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.

Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of unc oated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering.

Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard.

1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes.

2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing:

1. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces in accordance with recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indi cated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflas hing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimu m of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of c ounterflashing with installation of base flashing.

1. Insert counterflashing in reglets or rece ivers and fit tightly to base flashing.

2. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing.

3. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.

4. Secure in waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch centers unless otherwise indicated.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installati on of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. S eal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 573

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 10

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet me tal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufa cturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

B. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim t hat have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 574

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 1
SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 07 8443 "Joint Firestopping" for jo ints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. The following publications govern the work of this Section and are hereby incorporated in the Contract Documents as if bound herein. The standards described apply generally unless specifically indicated otherwise in the text. They are identified below by their publishers and are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR T ESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM E 84B91a Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 814B88 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops ASTM C 1193B91 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants

2. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL-05B92 Fire Resistance Directory
UL 723B93 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials UL 1479B83 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Product Data : For adhesives and sealants used inside the weather proofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 575

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 2
requirements for low-emitting materials list ed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firest opping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicati ng that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firest op Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits pe rmitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet becau se of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materi als per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 576

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 3

1. Perform penetration firestopping system te sts by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.

Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

F. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping System s: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistanc e rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 577

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 4
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50- cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

F. Accessories: Provide components for each pen etration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings re quired. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.

2. Substrate primers.

3. Collars.

4. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assemb led devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulat ions that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels co nsisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resi stant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intu mescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorgan ic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mi xing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-ex panding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cl oth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-in soluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 578

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 5
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone -based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manuf acturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and ot her items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetra tion firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening subs trates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating it ems to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writ ing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping syst ems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cu re, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techni ques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 579

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 6

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls c ontaining penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROT ECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-c eiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Penetration Identification: I dentify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firesto pping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penet ration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestoppi ng systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain condition s during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deteriorati on at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 580

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1
SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Latex joint sealants.

3. Acoustical joint sealants.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Product Data : For adhesives and sealants used inside the weather proofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials list ed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's colo r charts consisting of st rips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, jo int location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 581

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 2

4. Joint-sealant color.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint sealant and substrate material to be tested:

1. Joint-sealant location and designation.

2. Manufacturer and product name.

3. Type of substrate material.

4. Proposed test.

5. Number of samples required.

D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates an d joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and wri tten recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are needed for adhesion.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports : Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

F. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint seal ants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assembli es specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determi ne whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with glazing and gasket materials.

3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with masonry substrates.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 582

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 3

4. Submit manufacturer's recommended numbe r of pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials.

5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-seal ant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.

7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or , if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint- sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants acco rding to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.

Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or to re cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhe sion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of jo int sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature co nditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warrant y: Manufacturer agrees to furn ish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not co mply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 583

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 4
C. Special warranties specif ied in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates fr om causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint s ealants, backings, and ot her related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates unde r conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

F. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

G. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As sele cted by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Sealant materials exposed to view s hall match colors of adjacent surfaces. a. Provide custom colors to match Architect’s samples.

2. Provide custom-blended colors as needed for color matching as follows:
a. Sealant Joints in Masonry: Match mortar color
b. Joints in Cast Stone: Match color of matrix
c. Joints Around Doors, Windows, and Openings: Match color of adjacent wall material
d. Joints in Tile: Match grout color
e. Joints in Floors: Match control sample provided by Architect

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 584

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 5

3. Fully concealed joints:
a. As selected by Architect from manu facturer’s full color range which has best overall performance characteristics required for application

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-cu ring silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS, 311 NS, 890, or 890FTS.
c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil WS-290. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1 or Spectrem 800.

B. Silicone, S, NS, 50 NT: Single-Component, Nons ag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.
b. Pecora Corporation; 864, 895 or 898.
c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil WS-295. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 or Spectrem 3.

2.3 SELF-LEVELING SILI CONE TRAFFICJOINTS
A. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type SL; ASTM C 920, Type SL, Class 100/50, Use T; jet fuel resistant; gun-grade. a. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900SL.

B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D 5893/D 5893M, Type NS; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use T; gun-grade. a. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.

2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant s: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, NT: Mildew-r esistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capabilit y, nontraffic-use, silyl-terminated polyether joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. BASF Building Systems; MasterSeal NP 150.
b. Pecora Corporation; 898 NST.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or silic onized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR
c. Pecora Corporation; AIS 919
d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 585

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 6

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concea led Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Hilti CP605
c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
e. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

3. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint S ealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Sheet caulking for junction boxes:

1. “Lowry's Electrical Box Sealer”.

2. Tremco sheet caulking.

D. Sheet caulking for junction box es at fire-rated assemblies:

1. “Firestop Putty Pads” by Hevi-duty/Nelson.

2. Specified Technologies, Inc.

3. HILTI CP-617.

E. Backing Rod: Closed-cell, neoprene rod or polyethylene foam.

F. Cementitious sealant:

1. Spray-applied (40 pcf) Monokote Z-146
G. Sprayed Acoustical Sealant:

1. STI “SpecSeal Smoke ‘N’ Sound Acoustical Spray”

2. Hilti CP672.

2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaini ng; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by jo int-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 586

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 7

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as deter mined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cl eaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residu es or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint seal ants, with Installer pres ent, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installati on tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibilit y by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces wi th chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substr ate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 587

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 8
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacture r's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, punctu re, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

4. Install all sealants free of contaminated su bstances, in a uniform, continuous smooth free application without air gaps or voids, regardl ess of abutting surface profiles. A high level of workmanship and finish is required, as determined by the Architect.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicat ed; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint profile at locations i ndicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufactu rer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 588

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 9
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoust ical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perim eters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical join t sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a conti nuous ribbon concealed on ba ck of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-s ealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test complet ed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of jo int length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, ve rify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion -test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed se alants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensu re that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicat ed requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adj acent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 589

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 10

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing peri od from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and re pair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.8 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior and in terior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Arch itect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exteri or joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone S NS 100/50 NT.
b. Silicone, S, NS, 50 NT

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Arch itect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior join ts at the interior of window perimeters.

1. Joint Sealant:
a. Silicone S NS 100/50 NT.
b. Silicone, S, NS, 50 NT

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Arch itect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interi or joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant: Latex OP NF.

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Arch itect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant inte rior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant: STPE, Mildew Resistant, S, NS, NT.

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Arch itect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 590

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1
SECTION 08 1416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.

3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 08 8000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.

5. Product Data: Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

6. Product Data : For adhesives and sealants used inside the weather proofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials list ed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

7. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demo nstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and ha nd of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 591

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 2

1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing.

2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses.

3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile.

4. Details of electrical raceway and preparat ion for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems.

5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment.

6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

7. Clearances and undercuts.

8. Requirements for veneer matching.

9. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Provide Samples for each color, textur e, and pattern of plastic laminate required. c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples wi th same materials proposed for factory- finished doors.

3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.

4. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For door inspector.

1. Fire-Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1.

2. Egress Door Inspector: Submit doc umentation of compliance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4.

3. Submit copy of DHI's Fire and Egress D oor Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Special warranties.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufactu rer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is cert ified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 592

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 3
C. Fire-Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Insp ector for field quality-control inspections of fire- rated door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1.

D. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced st andard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in pl astic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is comple te and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to r epair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and fi nishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirem ents, provide products by one of the following:

1. Masonite Architectural - ASSA ABLOY Grou p company, including Grahman and Maiman wood doors

2. Oregon Door

3. VT Industries Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 593

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 4
B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Thermal and Acoustic Insulation

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene s hall not be intentionally added in insulation products.

F. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:

G. Certified Wood : Wood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.

H. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

I. Wood Veneers: All wood veneers for Project, for ea ch species, despite trade, regardless of use, must be coordinated with the Contractor, and be purchased from the same vendor and flitch selection.

2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements sp ecified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards and WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

1. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extra Heavy Duty: Public toilets, janitor' s closets, assembly sp aces, exits and where indicated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 594

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 5

3. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) and private toilets and where indicated.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complyin g with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection rati ngs indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Fo r units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testi ng agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

3. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

4. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

E. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.

2.4 VENEER-FACED DOORS FO R TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.

2. Species: White Oak.

3. Cut: Rift Sawn.

4. Thickness: 1 ¾ inches.

5. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.

6. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.

7. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.

8. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor- door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more.

9. Transom Match: Continuous match.

10. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. a. Fire-Rated Single Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical edges.
b. Fire-Rated Pairs of Doors: Provide fi re-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-s teel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

11. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.

12. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings.
a. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved screw- holding capability appro ved for use in doors of fire-protection ra tings indicated on Drawings as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 595

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 6

13. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.

14. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated.

2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Door s: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.

2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.

3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-p rotection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fi re-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood- veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

D. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.

E. Metal Louvers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Air Louvers, Inc.
b. Anemostat; a Mestek company.
c. L & L Louvers, Inc.
d. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
e. McGill Architectural Products.

2. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum wi th Class II, clear anodic finish, AA-M12C22A31.

F. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louver s with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes i ndicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is no t surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardwa re schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. For doors scheduled to receive electrified lo cksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware.

3. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 596

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 7
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.

1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-wi dth, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails.

Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.

D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."

3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standar d for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cut outs, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors that are indi cated to receive transparent finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium.

2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.

3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.

4. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's wr itten instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight.

1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. a. Secure with countersunk, conc ealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing sc rews for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 597

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 8

3. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80.

4. Install smoke- and draft-control doors in accordance with NFPA 105.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Inspections:

1. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door in accordance with NFPA 80, Section 5.2.

2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door loca ted in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements in accordance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.

C. Repair or remove and replace installations wh ere inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace door s that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace door s that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 598

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 1
SECTION 08 6250

TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Tubular daylighting devices and accessories.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes, diffuser assembly, and accessories.

4. Installation requirements.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Shop Drawings: For skylights. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Indicate structural loadings and reaction s to be transmitted to supporting curbs.

3. Include details of provisions for asse mbly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture within the assembly to the exterior.

4. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assembly, showing the following:
a. Joinery including concealed welds.
b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 599

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 2
e. Flashing and drainage.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For uni ts with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of ex posed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

F. Fabrication Sample: Of each framing intersecti on of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.

3. Expansion provisions.

4. Glazing.

5. Flashing and drainage.

G. Electrical wiring diagrams and recommendations for power and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Preconstruction Test Report s: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in m anufacture of tubular daylighting devices for minimum 20 years
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's aut horized representative who is trained and approved for installation of metal-framed skylights required for this Project.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Approved mockups may become part of t he completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original c ontainers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.

B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 600

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 3

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (tempera ture, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum re sults. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Daylighting Device: Manufacture r's standard warranty for 10 years.

B. Electrical Parts: Manufacturer's standard wa rranty for 5 years, unless otherwise indicated.

C. LED Emitters, Drivers and Controls: Manufacturer’s standard warranty for 3 years against failure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SolaMaster" Series, Model Number 750 DS, Closed Ceiling by Solatube International, or a comparable product by one of the following:

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Daylight Reflective Tubes: Spectralight Infini ty with Cool Tube Technology combines ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. Patented spectrally-selective optical surface yields an average total- and specul ar-reflectance greater than 99.5% percent for the Visible Light spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm) providing maximized visible light transmission and less than 25% reflectance for Infrared (IR) heat wavelengths (750 nm to 2500 nm) for minimized heat transmission, resulting in a spectrally-selective Total Solar Spectrum (250 nm to 2500 nm) reflectance less than 37 percent, as measured using a Perkin Elmer Lambda 1050 spectrophotometer with a Universal Reflectance Accessory. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308.

2.3 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Tr ansparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self- flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level di ffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16.

B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 750 DS, 21 inch Daylighting System:

1. Model:
a. Solatube Model 750 DS-C Closed (Pene trating) Ceiling. AAMA Type TDDCC.

2. Capture Zone:
a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.
1) Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibiting (100 percent UV C, 100 percent UV B and 98. 5 percent UV A), impact modified acrylic blend.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 601

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 4
a) Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to capture low angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight. b. Tube Ring: 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nom inal thickness injection molded ASA.

Prevents thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture. Attached to base of dome ring with butyl glazing rope 0.24 inch (6 mm) diameter; to minimize air infiltration.
c. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip , 0.63 inch (16 mm) tall by 0.28 inch (7 mm) wide.

3. Flashings:
a. Roof Flashing Base:
1) One Piece: One piece, seamless, le ak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet steel, corr osion resistant conforming to ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A463/A463M or ASTM A792/A792M, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm) thick. a) Base Style: Type FC, Curb cap, with inside dimensions of 27 inches by 27 inches (685 mm by 685 mm) to cover curb as specified in Section 07600.
b. Curbs: Metal Insulated Roof Curb: Corrosion resistant 18 Gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653 G90 with continuous welded seams, integrated base plate for water tightness and extra strength, lined with 1-1/2 inch fiberglass fireproof sound attenuating therma l insulation, factory installed 2 by 2 treated wood nailer secured to top ledge of curb. Curb designed for single-ply roofing, lightweight fill, or tapered insulation low slope roof types. 1) C16 16 inch (406 mm) high Metal insulated curb

4. Transfer Zone:
a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) conforming to ASTM B 209.
1) Reflective Tubes:
a) Reflective extension tube, Type EXX and Type EL with total length of run as indicated on the Drawings.
b) Interior Finish: Spectralight In finity with INFRAREDuction Technology combining ultra-high Visible Light re flectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance.
2) Tube Options
a) Extension Tube Angle Adapter: Provide manufacturer's standard adapters for applications requiring:
b) Type A2 two 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle adapters. c) Top Tube Angle Adapter, Type TA: Reflective 45 degree adjustable Top Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm) long.
d) Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Tube Angle Adapter Kit: Type AK, Reflective 45 degree adjustable top and bottom angle adapters (one each), 16 inches (406 mm) long
e) Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, Type BA: Reflective 45 degree adjustable Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm) long. f) Reflective extension tube, Type EL: 48 inches (1220 mm) long, replaces two normal 24-inch (610 mm) extension tubes when long tube runs are required.
g) Spectralight Infinity SoftLight Extension Tube: Type ES, 24 inch (610 mm) Super-reflective extension tube with structured surface providing precise light spread for enhanced visual comfort. Replaces one standard 24 inch (610 mm) extension tube in the tube assembly. h) Thermal Insulation Panel: Type TIP, high-performance dual-glazed, thermally-broken tube insulation system.
i) Open ceiling trim ring: Type R, ABS Plastic, White; nominal thickness of 0.04 inch (1 mm).

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 602

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 5
j) Wire Suspension Kit: Type E, Use the wire suspension kit when additional bracing to the structure is required.

5. Delivery Zone:
a. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 750 DS-C.

Ceiling mounted box transitioning from ro und tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bo ttom termination of tube; 23.8 inches by

23.8 inches (605 mm by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings.
1) Metal Transition Box: Type TM, Metal Round to Square transition box comprised of Spectralight Infinity SoftLi ght material with structured finish on exposed reflective surface, .015 in (0.4 mm) thick. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance with ASTM E308.

6. Round Metal Housing: Type TRS, Round metal housing for suspended ceiling grids.

Comprised of white powder coated 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel, a Spectralight Infinity sleeve and a white powder coated 24 gauge steel ceiling mounting plate.

7. Round Metal Housing: Ty pe TRH, Round metal housing for hard ceilings. Comprised of white powder coated 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel, a Spectralight Infinity sleeve and a white powder coated 24 gauge steel ceiling mounting plate. 1) Lens: Type L5 (Wide), OptiView Micr o-replicated lens design to maximize light output and diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2. b. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 750 DS-C.

Round ceiling mounted fixture transiti oning round tubing to ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube; 21 inch (530 mm) round frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. 1) Lens: Type L5 (Wide), Round OptiVi ew Micro-replicated lens design to maximize light output and diffusion. Vi sible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fa stened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.

B. Provide custom trim as indicated on drawings.

C. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement.

D. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elasto meric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 603

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 08 6250 - 6
B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit and wiring.

C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Coordinate installation with substrates, ai r and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing to ensure that each elem ent of the Work performs properly and that finished installation is weather tight.

1. Install flashing to produce weatherproof s eal with curb and overlap with roofing system termination at top of curb.

2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers.

3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material.

C. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylight s will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including preservative-treated wood, provide permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer
D. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances.

E. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor , or their designated representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units.

F. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manuf acturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged pr oducts before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 604

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 1
SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Glass products.

2. Laminated glass.

3. Glass with decorative film overlay.

4. Glazing sealants.

5. Glazing tapes.

6. Miscellaneous glazing materials.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 8300 "Mirrors."

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickne ss designations in m illimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and ve rify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

1. Submit System U-Value for each condition, with each glass type

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 605

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 2
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

4. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD ), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines an d have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demo nstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit scaled shop drawings showing layou t, jointing, achoring sizes and types, shapes, thickness, and other detailed information needed to fully describe fabrication and installation

2. Shop drawing submittal package shall be coor dinated with submission of related portions of Work.

D. Test Reports:

1. Stress and thermal analysis of glass

2. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant, and other glazing materials.

E. Glass Samples: For each type of glass pr oduct other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.

1. Coated glass.

2. Laminated glass.

3. Each decorative film overlay on type of decorative glass.

F. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

G. Glazing and Sealant Schedule: List glass ty pes and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

H. Delegated Design Submittal: For glass indica ted to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

I. Submit calculations specific to glass size s and thickness and heat treatments that glass will meet design load requirements for this building

1. Perform and submit thermal stress analysis fo r each glass type and size at each building elevation taking into account shading effect s. Append to thermal stress analysis a

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 606

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 3
statement from glass manufactur er that based upon this analysis that resulting thermal stresses will not reduce specified statistical probability of breakage

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for coated glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer wh o employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Perm anently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testi ng agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, w hether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-s tream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in other Division 8 sections to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Te sting: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing me mber for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitt ed based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether pr iming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optim um adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant m anufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 607

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 4
B. All tempered Glazing units and glazing units larger than 50 square feet shall be 100% heat soak tested per EN 14179-2016 in calibrated oven.

1. Records must be kept of heat soaking for each batch for QA/QC purposes and made available to the Architect on request. Such records shall include, as a minimum, the following:
a. Traceability of glass, i.e. source of supply and evidence of batching. b. Dates of tempering/heat soaking.
c. Certification that the glass will meet the perform ance requirements of this Specification.
d. Records to include details of all uni ts that failed during the heat soak test.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufac turer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not pr oceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambi ent and substrate temper ature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Gl ass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of c oated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions . Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glas s: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace la minated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's wr itten instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Heat-Soa ked Tempered Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace heat-soaked tempered glass units that s pontaneously break due to nickel sulfide (NiS) inclusions at a rate exceeding 0.3 percent (3 /1000) within specified warranty period. Coverage for any other cause is excluded.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 608

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professi onal engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withst and the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

4. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist t hermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites.

D. Safety Glazing: Provide safety glazing where required by code that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's pub lished test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-gl azing values, according to NFRC 300.

F. Sound Rating: Provide sound control assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as sound-retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the following minimum rating:

1. STC Rating: As indicated on Drawings as calculated by ASTM E 413 when tested in an operable condition according to ASTM E 90
G. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

H. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Glass Panes
a. Glass: 3.5 kg CO 2eq per kg/ 1.6 kg CO2eq per lb.

3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.

4. Declared Units: 1 kilogram or 1 pound.

5. Product Category Rules:
a. NSF International PCR for GANA Flat Glass, v.1, 2014-03-31

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 609

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 6

6. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

I. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

J. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass products by Vitro Architectural Glass or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Guardian Industries Corp.

2. Pilkington North America.

3. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

4. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from si ngle source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glass shall conform to ASTM C1048 and AST M C1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I – glazing select, and the following:

1. Glass edges shall be clean scored and cut.

2. Glass shall conform to the requirements of the Consumer Product Safety Commission's Standard 16 CFR 1201, the Safety Certificat ion Council, ANSI Z97.1-1975, and local codes, whichever is most stringent. Notify Engineer if safety glazing is required.

B. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicat ed, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

C. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float gla ss as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and calculations. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat -treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

D. Low Emissivity Coated Float Glass

1. Complying with ASTM C1376, coated by va cuum deposition (sputte r-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified in this Section

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 610

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 7
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with publishe d recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. NGA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "G lass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency ac ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

G. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.

H. Strength: Where annealed float glass is i ndicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthen ed float glass is indicated, provide heat- strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

I. Glass and glazing, in combination with adjacent construction, shall provide a fully weathertight system that promptly drains all incidental water to the exterior. Glass and glazing materials shall not block weeps or otherwise impede drain age. All glazing pockets shall drain incidental water at the sill of each lite of gl ass; internal drainage of the glazing pockets at vertical mullions is not acceptable.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Ultraclear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality-Q3; and with visible light transmission of not less than 91 percent and SHGC of not less than 0.87.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ultraclear glass products by Vitro Architectural Glass Starphi re or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.
b. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

D. Heat treated float glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I (t ransparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated, of kind and condition indicated. Al l heat strengthening and tempering shall be by the horizontal process, with IG units fabricated in such a manner as to have all roller distortion in a horizontal direction as installed in the building.

1. The minimum surface and edge compression shall comply with requirements of ASTM C 1048.

2. Requirements of ASTM C 1048 listed for 6 mm HS glass shall also apply for greater thicknesses.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 611

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 8

3. Fully Tempered glass shall conform to ANSI Z97.1.

4. Fully tempered glass shall be 100% heat soak tested per EN 14179-2016 in calibrated oven.
a. Unless otherwise specified, all fu lly tempered glass shall be heat soaked to minimize the occurrence of nickel sulfi de (NiS) crystals. This process shall be strictly controlled and carried out to EN 14179 paying particular attention to the temperature and duration of treatment.
b. Records must be kept of heat soaki ng for each batch for QA/QC purposes and made available to the Architect on request. Such records shall include, as a minimum, the following:
1) Traceability of glass, i.e. source of supply and evidence of batching. 2) Dates of tempering/heat soaking.
3) Certification that the glass will meet the performance requirements of this Specification.
4) Records to include details of all uni ts that failed during the heat soak test. c. Responsibility for NIS Inclusions:
1) Where glass is heat soak tested, the Co ntractor is to indemnify the Client in the event of more than 5 lite per 1000 of fully tempered glass.

E. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3; Quality-Q6, Finish F2 (patterned both sides), Pattern P3 (random).

F. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Ty pe II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3; Quality-Q6, Finish F2 (patterned both sides), Pattern P3 (random).

G. Reflective- and Low-E-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C1376.

H. Reflective- and Low-E-Coated Spand rel Glass: ASTM C1376, Kind CS.

I. Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensi onally stable, polyester film, film, 2-mil-minimum thickness, with pressure-sensit ive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable protective backing.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 3M FASARA films, Glace finish or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Manufacturers not listed but who do o ffer products that comply with the requirements of this Section will be cons idered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from m anufacturers full range to match color of spandrel panels.

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvin yl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 612

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 9

2.6 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: List ed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.

B. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass ma de from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16-inch total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distr ibuted by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus.
b. Schott North America, Inc.; Laminated Pyran Crystal. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L.

C. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, clear float glass; with intumescent inte rlayers; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; Pyrobel. b. Pilkington Group Limited (distributed by Technical Glass Products); PyroStop. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Contraflam N2 or SGG Swissflam N2.

2.7 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extr uded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene EPDM silicone or thermoplastic polyolef in rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of gl azing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.8 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' writt en instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone gl azing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 613

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 10
a. Dow Corning Corporation; DOWSIL 795.
b. Pecora Corporation; 896.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600.

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Produ cts: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant gl azing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.9 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Prefor med, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of gl ass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealer s: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks:

1. Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

D. Spacers:

1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

E. Edge Blocks:

1. Silicone with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazin g: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire- protection rating indicated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 614

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 11

2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite co mplying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

C. Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely a ligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and free from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in pattern indicated on Drawings to the back face of clean glass, according to manufactu rer's written instructions, including surface preparation and application temperature limitations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between join ts of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing member s receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and inte rior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily i dentifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during hand ling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where requi red for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 615

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 12
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass m anufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacer s on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that c oatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets ar e driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when co mpressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening wi th adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 616

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 13

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and fr ame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Cent er glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing be nding stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems unt il sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to pr ovide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contami nating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 617

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 14
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each ar ea of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.9 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type: Clear float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.

3. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type: Clear float glass with decorative film overlay.

1. Glass Type: Clear, float glass.

2. Glass Thickness: 6.0 mm.

3. Use: Suitable for interior applications.

4. Pattern: Match Architect's samples.

5. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.

3.10 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE

1. B. Glass Type: Clear laminated glass with decorative plastic interlayer.

1. Kind LA, consisting of two lites of 3.0 mm annealed float glass.

2. Total Thickness: ¼ inch.
a. Outer Lite: 1/8" clear Glass
b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch, but not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material.
1) Provide decorative color film, match Architect’s sample c. Indoor Lite: 1/8" clear Glass

3. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.

4. Provide safety glazing labeling.

C. Glass Type: Clear la minated acoustic glass.

1. Kind LA, consisting of two lites of 6.0 mm annealed float glass.

2. Outer Lite: 1/4" clear Glass

3. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch, but not less than that required to comply as a Type II safety glass material.

4. Indoor Lite: 3/8" clear Glass

5. STC: 40 minimum.

6. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.

7. Provide decorative film overlay where indicated.

8. Provide safety glazing labeling.

3.11 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type: Low-E-coated, cl ear insulating laminated glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Outdoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of annealed float glass. a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3 mm.
b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).

3. Interspace Content: Air.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 618

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GLAZING 08 8000 - 15

4. Indoor Lite: Clear glass:
a. Minimum Thickness of Indoor Lite: 6 mm.

5. Low-E Coating: Second surface.

6. Glass shall be annealed, heat-strengthened or tempered as required by codes and as specified on drawings.

3.12 FIRE-PROTECTIO N-RATED GLAZING TYPES
A. Glass Type: 45-minute fire-rated glazing; laminated ceramic glazing.

1. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type: 45-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise limitation; laminated glass with intumescent interlayers.

1. Provide safety glazing labeling.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 619

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 1

SECTION 09 2216

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.

3. Grid suspensi on systems for gypsum board ceilings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD ), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines an d have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demo nstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of co de-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Evaluation Reports: For embossed steel studs and tracks, firestop tracks, post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 620

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code-Compliance Certificat ion of Studs and Tracks: Prov ide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-ce rtification program of t he Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry As sociation, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installation.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required by AISI S202, "Code of Standard Practice for Cold- Formed Steel Structural Framing."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assembli es, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Dr awings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa).

D. Design framing systems in accordance with AI SI S220, "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Nonstructural Members," unless otherwise indicated.

E. Design Loads: As indicated on architectural Drawings or 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa) minimum as required by the IBC.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

G. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

H. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section when available.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 621

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 3

2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Steel
a. Light-gauge metal framing – 3.0 kg CO 2eq per kg/ 1.4 kg CO2eq per lb.

3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.

4. Declared Units: 1 kilogram or 1 pound.

5. Product Category Rules:
a. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR for Thin walled profiles and profiled panels of metal, v.1.0/1.7/1.0, 2019-01-08
b. International EPD System PCR for Basic iron or steel products & special steels, except construction products, v.2.0, 2020-03-27.
c. UL Environment PCR for Designated St eel Construction Products, v.2.0, 2020-12-

31. 6. Material Ingredients –Docum entation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.

2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems

3. MarinoWARE.

4. MBA Building Supplies

5. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post consumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Framing Members, General: Comply with AI SI S220 and ASTM C645, for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with AISI S220 and ASTM C645, requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated

2. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C645; ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120) ; or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance. Galvannealed products are unacceptable. a. Coating demonstrates equivalent corrosi on resistance with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Studs and Runners: AISI S220 and ASTM C645. Use either steel studs and runners or embossed steel studs and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-for med and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical movement.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 622

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 4

2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, in stalled with studs fricti on fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

3. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top run ners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for st uds and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulti ng from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

F. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allo w partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

G. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel shee t for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.

H. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-in chminimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1- 1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

I. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

J. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

K. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch unc oated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated- edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated- steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

L. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted we b, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thi ckness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fa stener systems with an ev aluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 AC193 AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.
a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 623

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 5

b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anch or torque-controlled, adhesive anchor or adhesive anchor.
c. Material for Interior Loca tions: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. d. Material for Exterior or Interior Loca tions and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated:

Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fa stener systems with an eval uation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings.

E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0190 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.

5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. United States Gypsum Company.

2.4 ISOLATORS
A. Resilient Sway Bracing:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Mason Industries types “D NSB” and “WIC” (714-630-0701), b. Kinetics Noise Control types “ PSB” and “Unibrace” (614-889-0480) B. Isolators for Resilient Ceilings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Heavy Duty
1) Mason Industries “30N”
2) Kinetics Noise Control “Gotham.” (ICC)
b. Light Duty:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 624

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 6

1) Mason Industries “WHR”
2) Kinetics “AF”.

C. Neoprene Partition Supports:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Mason Industries “NPS.”
D. Damping compound: Provide visco-elastic vibration damping compound in liquid form for spray application. Damping compound shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, water-based emulsion suitable for covering metal surfaces.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Soundcoat Company GP-1, Irvine, CA (949-955-9202)
b. Blachford, Inc. Aquaplas DL- 10, Chicago, IL (630-231-8300) c. Kinetics Noise Control KDC-E- 162, Dublin, OH (614-889-0480) d. Silent Running SR500 (203-469-1337)
e. Pyrotek Noise Control Sound Paint SP150 (509-991-8548).

E. Steel Deck Insert: One piece fire retardant plug for steel deck flutes:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. J-M “Deck Plug Fire Stop”.

F. Partition Isolation Pad and Anchor Isolator:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Kinetics Model Wallmat
1) Model Wallmat is 1/2-inch (13-mm) thick and designed to carry continuous loads up to 25-psi (17-N/cm2) without excessive creep or pad failure.

G. Sound Isolation Clips:

1. Sound isolation clips specified shall be designed and manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, Ohio. Product shall be Model Iso-Max Sound Isolation Clips.

2. Vertical Load capacity. Clips shall have sufficient capacity to support wall or ceiling weights as constructed. In a vertical load te st comparible to a ceiling installation, the clip shall have a minimum design load capacity of 36 lbs. using 25 gauge furring channel.

The minimum design load capacity when using 22 gauge furring channel shall be 48 lbs.

Design Load capacity shall be based on a safety factor where the load to failure, defined as pullout of the channel from the clip, is a minimum 2.5 times the allowable maximum Design Load. Anchors for attachment of the clips to the substructure shall be selected to support wall and/or ceiling weights at each clip.

3. The isolation clips shall consist of a r ubber element into which a standard galvanized steel furring channel, 7/8 in. x minimum 25 gauge, is captured. The channel legs snap fit into the rubber element without any metal-to -metal or other rigid contact with building elements.

4. The isolation clip is attached to the wall/ ceiling framing or other structural substrate through galvanized steel brackets on each si de of the rubber isolation element. The brackets shall be of sufficient strength to carry the wall or ceiling weight without bending or failure.

H. Provide engineering and inspection services for all resilient ceiling and wall isolator installations.

An engineer retained by the manufacturer is responsible to provide detailed design of isolator installations in compliance with loading criteria defined by the project’s structural engineer.

Submit spacing of isolators for each wall and ceiling condition.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 625

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 7

I. Furnish and install ceiling and wall isolators at all rooms having concrete floating floors and where indicated.

J. Size isolators to comply with load and deflection requirements.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Wa lls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-c ell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inchthick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts an d other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-r esistive materials are applied, atta ch offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 incheso.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire- resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 626

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 8

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inch es o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exteri or masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within fram ing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floor s and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceiling s except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue fr aming around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extend s to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing system s that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for in stallation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openi ngs other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indi cated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 627

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 9

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 incheso.c.

F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surf ace, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing me mber so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inchfrom the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components accordi ng to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.

3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building st ructure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install s upplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, includ ing intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that w ill not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 628

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 10

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspensi on systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join ma in beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Isolation clips: Spacing and location of s ound isolation clips shall be determined by the manufacturer based on wall or ceiling type. Insta llation drawing details shall be provided by the manufacturer to assure optimum sound control and structural integrity of the system.

H. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 629

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1

SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

2. Section 09 3000 "Tiling" for cementitious backe r units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

5. Product Data : Laboratory test reports for ceilings , walls, acoustical and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Samples: For the following products:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 630

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 2

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installa tion, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effect s and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels unt il installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that ar e wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-r esistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Sound-Rated Assemblies: For Sound-rated as semblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Environmental Certification: Provide material s carrying certification by one of the following:

1. Greenguard Gold Certification
D. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 631

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 3

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

E. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Finishes
a. Gypsum Board – 4500 kg CO 2eq per 1000 m2/420 kgCO2 eq 1,000 per ft2

3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.

4. Declared Units: 1 square meter or 1 square foot.

5. Product Category Rules:
a. ASTM International PCR for North American Glass Mat Gypsum Panels, v.1, 2016-08-01.
b. NSF International PCR for PCR for Gypsum Panel Products, v.1, 2019-07-17

6. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

F. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

G. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:

1. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
H. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

I. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer re cycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Products:
a. United States Gypsum Company, LLC, “USG Sheetrock® Brand EcoSmart Panels Firecode® X”.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 632

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 4

b. Certainteed Type X Gypsum Board.

B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118. 9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement Underlayment or BackerBoard. b. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc or Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not le ss than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compat ible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

C. Custom Trim Components: Edge trim system for transitions between drywall and suspended ceilings. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel,

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 633

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 5

1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Axiom.
a. Provide trim as indicated on drawings.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: Fo r each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding t ape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 fi nish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing P anel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2. Cementitious Backer Units: As re commended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide au xiliary materials that comply with referenced installati on standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 100 2, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound-Absorptive Fabric Layer: Black So undex sheet membrane shop applied to backs of panels. Non-woven fabric with Class 1 fire rating. Perforated panels with absorbing material to achieve an NRC of 0.70-0.80 minimum.

1. Products:
a. Owens Corning – SelectSound Black Acoustical Board
b. MBI Products – Blackout Theater Board
c. Thermafiber – SoundZero
d. Armstrong BioAcoustic Infill panel.
e. Knauf Black Acoustical Board.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's st andard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 634

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 6

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

F. Thermal and Acoustic Insulation: As spec ified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." G. Moldable putty for application to electrical boxes and other penetrations of acoustical barriers.

1. Pre-formed 1/8-inch pads

2. Non-toxic, asbestos-free

3. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a. Quiet Putty QP-380 by Quiet Solu tion; 1250 Elko Dr.; Sunnyvale, CA 94089; 800/797-8159
b. Outlet Box Pads by Harry A. Lowry & Associates, 11176 Penrose St., Sun Valley, CA 91352, 818/768-4661
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, exc ept in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 635

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 7

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural me mbers projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit prof ile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/ 2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panel s so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Seal constructi on at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perim eters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or thro ugh assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before inst alling gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type X: Vertical surf aces unless otherwise indicated.

2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.

3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.

4. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wa ll/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vert ically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, in stall panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated fo r base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 636

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 8

joints, unless otherwise indicated or require d by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Wh ere gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

E. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch-long stra ight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base la yer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.

Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108. 11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panel s in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints accord ing to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside co rners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.

3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

5. U-Bead: Use where indicated.

6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interi or angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 637

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 9

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, co ncealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

1. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.

2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

3. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration.

4. For Level 1 gypsum board finish, embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher leve l of finish is required for fire-resistance- rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish acco rding to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contract or installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report defici encies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair su rfaces stained, marred, or ot herwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensati on, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 638

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 1
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Porcelain tile.

2. Glazed wall tile.

3. Crack isolation membrane

4. Metal edge strips.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for sea ling of expansion, cont raction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, AN SI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for su bstrates and for preparation by other trades.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 639

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 2

4. Product Data : Laboratory test reports for ceilings , walls, acoustical and thermal insulation, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and ac cessory for each color and finish required.

4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipm ent, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 640

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 3

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association.

2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds t he International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification.

3. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Fo undation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.

4. Installer employs at least one installer fo r Project that has completed the Advanced Certification for Tile Installers (ACT) cert ification for installation of gauged porcelain tile/gauged porcelain tile panels and slabs and large format tile.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.

2. Approved mockups may become part of t he completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in origi nal containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elev ated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened c ontainers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions ar e maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or fini sh from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materi als: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 641

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 4

1. Crack isolation membrane.

2. Joint sealants.

3. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard gra de requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color va riations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coati ng: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mo rtar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

G. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

H. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

I. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:

1. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
J. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

K. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 642

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 5

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Tile Type: .

1. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on finish legend.

2. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Grout Color: As selected by Arch itect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Tile Trim Units

1. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoini ng flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight, module size to match adjacent tile size.
b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size to match adjacent tile.
c. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Re gular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. d. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Inst allations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile.
e. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, se lected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethy lene with dovetail-shaped corrugations and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16-inch nominal thickness.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Medium-Bed, Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Custom Building Products or comparable product by one of the following:
a. ARDEX Americas.
b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
c. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, co mposed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 643

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 6
B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TEC® Power Grout®, or comparable product by one of the following:
a. ARDEX Americas.
b. Custom Building Products
c. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
d. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compoun ds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indica ted below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar a nd grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

1. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary li quid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic, designed; white zinc alloy or stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Schluter Systems LP or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Blanke Corporation.
b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.

D. Edge protecting metal trim for protecting outside corners:

1. Basis of Design: Schluter Jolly

2. Material: Color coated aluminum.

3. Size: as selected by Architect from full range.

4. Color: as selected by Architect from full range.

E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of re moving soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for material s and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 644

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchor s, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrat es are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where indicated, prepare substrates to rece ive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variati ons, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

C. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation sc hedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwis e indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes w here necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unle ss otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile . Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 645

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 8

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints bet ween tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

F. Joint Widths: As narrow as tile will allow, but in no case wider than ¼ inch.

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints an d other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, lo cate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install cementitious backer units and treat jo ints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indi cated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouti ng, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile acco rding to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 day s after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of t ile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from e ffects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls.

B. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 646

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TILING 09 3000 - 9

3.8 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Walls, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:

1. W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment. a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar.
b. Grout: High-performance grout.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 647

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 1
SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and expo sed suspension systems for interior ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD ), Option 1: Life Cycle Assessments or EPDs that conform to USGBC guidelines an d have at least a cradle to gate scope and demonstrates product complies with required Global Warming Potential Baseline.
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demo nstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 648

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 2
E. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch-square Samp les of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color.

F. Delegated-Des ign Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflec ted ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension-system members.

2. Structural members to which su spension systems will be attached.

3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchor s, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.

5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Diffusers.
c. Grilles.
d. Speakers.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
g. Perimeter moldings.

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding component s covered by or adjacent to acoustical panels.

8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical pan el ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical pan el ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panel s equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantit y of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 649

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 3

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, su spension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned sp ace where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit t hem to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acou stical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of ac oustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professi onal engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings sha ll withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with AST M E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 650

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 4
E. Sustainability Performance Requirements: For all permanently installed products and materials related to the work of this Section, provide products and materials that meet the Project's performance criteria as outlined in the following Section

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

F. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section where available.

2. Embodied Carbon (GWP) Baselines: Finishes
a. Ceiling Panels – 30 kg CO 2eq per m2/ 2.8 kgCO2 eq per ft2

3. System Boundary: Product Stage A1-A3.

4. Declared Units: 1 square meter or 1 square foot.

5. Product Category Rules: Non-metal ceilings
a. Guidance for Building Related Products and Services, From the range of Environmental Product Declarations of UL Environment: “Part B: Non-Metal Ceiling Panel EPD Requirements”, October 2015v 1. North American LCA Environmental Impact Results
b. UL Environment PCR for Part B: N on-Metal Ceiling Panels, v.1, 2015-10-16 c. PCR Guidance for Building-Related Products and Services Part A: Life Cycle Assessment Calculation Rules and Repo rt Requirements. Version 3.2. UL Environment. September 2018 PCR Guidance for Building-Related Products and Services Part B: Flooring EPD Requirements. Version 2. UL Environment.

September 2018.
d. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR fo r Mineral panels, v.1.0/1.6/1.1, 2018-12-10

6. Product Category Ru les: Metal ceilings
a. Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. PCR fo r Metal Ceilings, v.1.0/1.7/1.0, 2019-01-08

7. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

G. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

H. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

I. Additional Low-emitting requirements –Thermal and Acoustic Insulation

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Methylene chloride and perchloroethylene s hall not be intentionally added in insulation products.

J. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 651

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 5

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Recycled Content: Postcons umer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufactu rer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Ty pe E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Optima #3251 PB
B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, cloth. 1 Pattern: E (lightly textured)
C. Color: White.

D. LR: 0.95
E. NRC: 0.90
F. AC: 190
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit fl ange of exposed suspension system members.

H. Thickness: 1 inch
I. Modular Size: 12 by 60 inches.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, prov ide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.

B. Recycled Content : Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 652

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 6
C. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Su spension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.

3. Face Design: Flat, flush.

4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel or aluminum.

5. Cap Finish: Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range.

D. Custom Trim Components: Edge trim system for transitions between drywall and suspended ceilings. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 trim channel,

1. Basis of Design: Armstrong Axiom.
a. Provide trim as indicated on drawings.

2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and ma terial indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled bonded anchors.
b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/ A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for it s stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

D. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less t han 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.

E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical panels in place during a seismic event.

F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's st andard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard comp ression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. CertainTeed Corp.

3. Fry Reglet Corporation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 653

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 7

4. Gordon, Inc.

5. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge deta ils, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as th at formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

C. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements.

1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C 22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

2. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Mini mum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufactu rer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Hilti CP605
c. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standar d sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.

2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 654

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 8

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and es tablish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using le ss-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Layout openings for penetrations ce ntered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, seismic design requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building' s structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required and, if per mitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal fo rces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hange rs at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install suppl emental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit insta llation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide h angers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indica ted at perimeter of acou stical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 655

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 9

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.

3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension- system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.

5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

6. Install seismic clips in areas indicated; space according to panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts ac cording to requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufac turer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 656

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 1
SECTION 09 6513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Resilient base.

2. Resilient molding accessories.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient base and access ory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for ever y 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 657

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation material s in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient pr oducts after other finishing operat ions, including paint ing, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 658

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 3

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Flooring:

1. FloorScore Compliance: Hard Surface flooring and Adhesives shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

F. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on the drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Nora systems Inc.

2. Roppe Corporation USA

3. Tarkett Johnsonite

2.3 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861 Ty pe TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or ASTM F 1861 Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered).

2. Style and Location:
a. Style A, Straight: In areas with carpet.
b. Style B, Cove: In areas with resilient flooring.

B. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

C. Height: 4 inches.

D. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

E. Outside Corners: Job formed.

F. Inside Corners: Job formed.

G. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.4 MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description:

1. Cap for cove carpet.

2. Cap for cove resilient flooring.

3. Carpet bar for tackless installations.

4. Carpet edge for glue-down applications.

5. Nosing for carpet.

6. Nosing for resilient flooring.

7. Reducer strip for resilient flooring.

8. Joiner for tile and carpet.

9. Transition strips.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 659

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 4
B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

C. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.

D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. All adhesives will be required to carry Cradle to Cradle Silver certification score or higher, including the following:
a. truRenew Carpet Flooring Adhesive SP by WF Taylor
b. Shaw 5100 Adhesive
c. XL Brands flooring adhesives
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with m ill finish, nominal 2 inches wide, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are fr ee of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Installation of resilient products indicate s acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer 's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subs trates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient pro ducts until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installati on, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installati on, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 660

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 5

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pila sters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Form without producing disc oloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of ma ximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instru ctions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructio ns for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 661

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 1
SECTION 09 6515

RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Rubber Sheet Flooring.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 09 6513 “Resilient Base and Accessories” for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

4. Product Data : Laboratory tests for flooring products, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials list ed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

5. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: provide the following information:
a. Environmental Product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients Documentation dem onstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient floor.

1. Include sheet flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

2. Show details of special patterns.

D. Samples:

1. Full-size units of each color, textur e, and pattern of sheet flooring required.

2. For each exposed product and for each colo r, texture, and pattern specified, in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.

3. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-si ze Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 662

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 2
E. Product Schedule: For flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of flooring to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employ s installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for flooring installation and seaming method indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, co lor, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 60 deg F or more than 80deg F, in spaces to receive flooring during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 72 hours after installation.

B. The ambient relative humidity is recommended to be 50% RH ± 10%; however, dew point must be avoided.

C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 663

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 3
E. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resili ent flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classificati on: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. Slip Resistance: Provide products identical to those tested for slip resistance per ASTM D 2047 with a static coefficient of friction not less than 0.6 for level surfaces and 0.8 for ramped surfaces.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

E. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

F. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

G. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Flooring:

1. FloorScore Compliance: Hard Surface flooring and Adhesives shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

2. Sustainable Product Certification: Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140.

H. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to complianc e with requirements, provide Johnsonite Rubber Flooring.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1859.

1. Type: Type I, homogeneous rubber sheet floor covering.

2. Thickness: 0.12 inch.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 664

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 4

3. Hardness: Shore type “A”, 92, meas ured using Shore, Type A durometer per ASTM D 2240.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.

E. Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.

F. Colors and Patterns:

1. RF-01: VN5 The blues

2. RF-02: 84 blue jeans

3. RF-03: 58 Windsor blue

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit flooring and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:

1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's so lid-strand product for heat welding seams. a. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to contrast with flooring.

D. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.

E. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings.

F. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous rubber composition, tapered or bull nose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available.

G. Provide metal edge strips of width shown on the drawings and of required thickness to protect exposed edges of the flooring. Provide units of maximum available length to minimize the number of joints. Use butt-type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage, or overlap-type metal edge strips for exposed anchorage. Unless ot herwise shown, provide strips made of extruded aluminum with a mill finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 665

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 5

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silic one, using mechanical methods recommended by flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.

Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each in stallation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-s itu probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subs trates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient flooring.

3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instruct ions for installing resilient sheet flooring.

B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.

3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.

4. Avoid cross seams.

D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to bu tt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spac es, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 666

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6515 - 6
G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

I. Seamless Installation:

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seam less flooring installation. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written inst ructions for cleaning and protecting flooring.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentati ons, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover flooring until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 667

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 1
SECTION 09 8430

SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes shop-fabricated, acoustical panel units tested for acoustical performance, including the following:

1. Sound-absorbing wall panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 668

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 2

2. Include details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials.

3. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work.

D. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Panel Edge: 12-inch-long Sample(s) show ing each edge profile, corner, and finish.

2. Core Material: 12-inch-s quare Sample at corner.

3. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples.

4. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and mounting methods.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats.

2. Items penetrating or covered by units including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Alarms.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.

3. Show operation of hinged and sliding com ponents covered by or adjacent to units.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of unit.

C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than five devices, including unopened adhesives.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is ce rtified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Vendor Qualifications : A vendor that is certified for c hain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 669

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 3

1. Build mockup of typical wall area 48 inches wide by full height. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with unit manufacturers' written in structions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation.

1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install uni ts until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet- work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintain ed at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Lighting: Do not install units until a lighting leve l of not less than 50 fc is provided on surfaces to receive the units.

C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect units from exposu re to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

D. Field Measurements: Verify unit locations an d actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate them on Shop Drawings.

1.12 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to r epair or replace units and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Acoustical performance.
b. Warping of core.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall units specified in this Section from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units sha ll comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and insp ecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 670

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 4

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acc eptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or NFPA 286.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

F. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.3 SOUND ABSORBING FELT PLANKS SM-02
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Filzfelt ARO Plank

1.3. B. Content: 100% Wool Design Felt + Acoust ic Substrate indicated by manufacturer.

C. Plank Thickness: As indicated on drawings
D. Plank Widths: As indicated on drawings
E. Pattern: ARO Plank 1.3
F. Repeat Width: As indicated on drawings

2.4 SOUND ABSORBING FELT PANELS SM-03
A. Basis of Design: Provide Akustika 10 Wall panel s by Filzfelt or a comparable product by one of the following:

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 671

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 5

B. Wall mounted acoustic system.

C. Content: 100% Wool Design Felt + Acoustic Substrate
D. Panel Thickness: 5 mm minimum.

E. NRC: 0.60
F. Edge: Wrapped
G. Mounting: Z-Clips
H. Color and finish: as selected by Architect from full range.

2.5 MATERIALS
A. Core Materials: Manufacturer's standard.

1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612; of type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2. Tackable, Impact-Resistant, High-Density Boar d for Face Layer: 1/8-inch-thick layer of compressed molded glass-fiber board with a nominal density of 16 to 18 lb/cu. ft. laminated to face of core.

B. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, and as follows:

1. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's st andard construction unless otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.

B. Edge Hardening: For glass-fiber board and miner al-fiber board cores, chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached.

C. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, or sags.

D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following:

1. Thickness.

2. Edge straightness.

3. Overall length and width.

4. Squareness from corner to corner.

5. Chords, radii, and diameters.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 672

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

SOUND-ABSORBING PANELS 09 8430 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwi se indicated, install units with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

B. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/32 inch wide.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 673

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 1
SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the appl ication of paint systems on interior substrates.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees a nd not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Appr oved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.

2. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 674

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 2

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of pai nt system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

E. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of ea ch paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to repres ent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color sele ctions will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly cover ed containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperat ure of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 675

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 3
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. PPG Architectural Coatings.

3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, pr ovide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

D. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:

1. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

G. Colors: Match Architect's samples.

1. Twenty five percent of surfac e area will be painted with deep tones.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualifi ed testing agency to sample paint materials.

Contractor will be notified in advance and ma y be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 676

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 4

2. Testing agency will perfo rm tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applyi ng coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requ irements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project si te, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remo ve rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with App licator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: W hen measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Wood: 15 percent.

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including su rface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates ac ceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written inst ructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use work ers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.

Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or al kalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar join ts exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 677

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 5
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's writt en instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panel s, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules ma y be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surfac e films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, El ectrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 678

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 6
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of me tal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and rest ore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thicknes s of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, C ontractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spa ttered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacin g, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectura l Latex System, MPI INT 5.1:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, ant icorrosive, for metal, MPI #79. 1) Benjamin Moore® Super Spec HP® Alkyd Metal Primer P06 (326 g/L). 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Primer.
3) Sherwin Williams: Pro Industrial Kem Bond HS
b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, hi gh performance architectural, matching topcoat.
a. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen N537. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Eggshell, 6-9310 Series.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel B41W01951 b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Eggshell N538.
2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Satin, 69410.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140 X-Green.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 679

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 7
1) Benjamin Moore® Ultra Spec® 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Lo Lustre, 6-9610.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performanc e architectural, semigloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Lifemaster Interi or 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss, 59211 3) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss B. Wood Substrates: Wood trim and Architectural woodwork.

1. High-Performance Architectura l Latex System, MPI INT 6.3A:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. 1) Benjamin Moore® Multi-purpose primer 067
2) PPG Paints; Seal Grip Interior/Ext erior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17- 921XI Series
3) Sherwin Williams PrepRite ProB lock Primer Sealer B51W00620 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, hi gh performance architectural, matching topcoat.
a. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen N537. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Eggshell, 6-9310 Series.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel B41W01951 b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Eggshell N538.
2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Satin, 69410.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore® Ultra Spec® 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Lo Lustre, 6-9610.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performanc e architectural, semigloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Lifemaster Interi or 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss, 59211 3) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss C. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectura l Latex System, MPI INT 9.2B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. 1) Benjamin Moore Fresh Start High-Hiding All Purpose Primer 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Zero Interior Zero VOC Latex Sealer 6-4900XI 3) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Zero Interior Latex Primer B28W08150. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, hi gh performance architectural, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen N537. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Eggshell, 6-9310 Series.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel B41W01951 d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Latex Eggshell N538.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 680

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 8
2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Satin, 69410.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Interior Acrylic Latex Eg-Shel e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore® Ultra Spec® 500 Interior Semi-Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Speedhide Max Lo Lustre, 6-9610.
3) Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performanc e architectural, semigloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141 X-Green.
1) Benjamin Moore Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Gloss N546. 2) PPG Paints; Lifemaster Interi or 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss, 59211 3) Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 681

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 1
SECTION 10 1100

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Visual display board assemblies:
a. Markerboards.

2. Visual display rails.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual component s and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.

6. Product Data: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

7. Product Data : For adhesives and sealants used inside the weather proofing system, indicating VOC content and laboratory test reports showing compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials list ed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

8. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

9. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demo nstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of panel joints.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 682

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 2

2. Show locations of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces.

3. Include sections of typical trim members.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Fo r each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factory- applied color finishes, and as follows:

1. Samples of facings for each visual disp lay panel type, indicating color and texture.

2. Actual factory-finish color samples, applied to substrate.

3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.

E. Samples for Verification: For each ty pe of visual display surface indicated.

1. Visual Display Surface: Not less t han 8-1/2 by 11 inches, mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.

2. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile.

3. Display Rail: 6-inch-long sections.

F. Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces . Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's aut horized representative who is trained and approved for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufactu rer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is cert ified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without jo ints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require deliver y in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display surfaces vertica lly with packing materials between each unit.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet wo rk in spaces is co mplete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 683

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 3

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain -enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of vis ual display unit from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and unless ot herwise noted, provide products by one of the following:

1. Marker Board:
a. Clarus inc Wall to Wall Pure White

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

E. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Paints and Coatings:

1. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”
F. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 684

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 4
G. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:

H. Certified Wood : Wood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.

I. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.3 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY
A. Visual Display Board Asse mbly: factory fabricated.

1. Assembly: markerboard.

2. Corners: Square.

3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.

B. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-fac ed markerboard panel on core indicated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; slim size and standard shape.

1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.

D. Joints: Make joints only w here total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around ce nter of board, as acceptable to Architect as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

E. Combination Assemblies: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed trim between abutting sections of visual display panels.

F. Markertray: Manufacturer's standard; continuous.

1. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends.

G. Map Rail: Provide the following accessories:

1. Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately 1 to 2 inches wide.

2. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.

3. Poster Clips: Four map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 6 feet of map rail or fraction thereof.

2.4 DISPLAY RAILS
A. Aluminum Display Rail: Continuous and int egral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately 1 to 2 inches wide..

1. Tackable Insert Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 685

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 5

2. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail.

3. Poster Clips: Four map hooks with flexible metal clips for every 6 feet of map rail or fraction thereof.

2.5 MARKERBOARD PANELS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive.

1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.021 inch uncoated base metal thickness.

2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/ 4 inch thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing.

3. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standar d, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

2.6 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-coat process.

B. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer , compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board quality; face sanded for natural finish with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

C. Medium-Density Fiberboar d: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

D. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

F. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resis tant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for su bstrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surf aces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable va riations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M 12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 686

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 1100 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper prep aration and backing for visual display surfaces.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of fl aking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and su bstances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces and wall surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indica ted below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing mate rials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

1. Mounting Height: 36 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICAT ED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND ASSEMBLIES A. Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clip s, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure both top and bottom of boards to walls.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VISUAL DISPLAY RAILS
A. Display Rails: Install rails in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at height indicated below. Attach to wall surface with fasteners at not more than 16 inches o.c.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean visual display surfaces according to ma nufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 687

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 1
SECTION 10 4413

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 10 4416 "Fire Extinguishers."

1.3 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Product Data : Laboratory test reports for interior products indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials list ed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 688

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 2
E. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-prote ction cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fi re-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection c abinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: List ed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

D. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

E. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 689

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 3

1. Basis of Design Product – Recessed cabinet: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s model #0-2409 or comparable product by one of the following:
a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Basis of Design Product – Semi-Recessed and surface mounted cabinet: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s model #2409 – Architectural Series or comparable product by one of the following:
a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Cabinet Construction: UL listed with fire re sistance rating of hall where it is installed.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rat ed cabinets with double walls fabricated from

0.043-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined wi th minimum 5/8-inch-thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Recessed Cabinet:

1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, wi thout overlapping trim attached to cabinet.

Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead.

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combinatio n trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

F. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully ex posed and mounted directly on wall with no trim.

G. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

H. Door Material: Steel sheet.

I. Door Style:

1. Recessed Cabinet: Vertical duo panel with frame.

2. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: Solid opaque panel with frame.

3. Surface Mounted Cabinet: Solid opaque panel with frame.

J. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Cl ear transparent acrylic sheet.

K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

L. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-i ron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.

3. Door Lock: Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 690

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 4

4. Identification: Lettering complying with author ities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-p rotection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Pres sure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.

5. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries.

6. Manufactures projecting wall mounted sign, indicating ‘FIRE EXTINGUISHER”. 1) Application Process: Pres sure-sensitive vinyl letters. 2) Lettering Color: Red.
3) Orientation: Vertical.

M. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Baked enamel, TGIC polyester powder coat, HAA polyester powder coat, epoxy powder coat, or polyester/epoxy hybrid powder coat, complying with AAMA 2603.
b. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B221 for extruded shapes and aluminum sheet, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet. a. Finish: Color anodic.
b. Color: As selected by Architect fr om full range of industry colors and color densities.

3. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304. a. Finish: ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 directional satin finish,.

4. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D4802, Catego ry A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer 's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Miter corners and grind smooth.

3. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.

5. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors accordin g to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 691

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 5

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finish es Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable va riations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecess ed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in lo cations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabi nets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recess ed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and stripp able films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet insta llation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-prote ction cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire- protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 692

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 6
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 693

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 1
SECTION 10 4416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

B. Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried fire extinguishers.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 10 4413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Incl ude rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and prof iles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Co ordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire- protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire ex tinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fo rm in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 694

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire ex tinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled fo r type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRI ED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
e. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
d. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with autho rities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguisher s with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Horizontal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 695

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 3
B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 696

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 1
SECTION 12 2413

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Ca rpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include styles, material descriptions, c onstruction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

4. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installati on details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for ea ch color and texture specified, 10 inches long.

E. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 697

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 2

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of s hadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 per cent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Archit ect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages , marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install ro ller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are in dicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Arch itect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 25 Years from Date of Substantial Completion

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 698

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 3
B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 Year from Date of Substantial Completion PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

B. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

C. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

D. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance wi th requirements, provi de Mecho/5 System by Mechoshades Systems Inc or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Manufacturers not listed but who do offer prod ucts that comply with the requirements of this Section will be considered as substitute manufacturers, subject to the conditions specified in Division 1 Section Product Substitution Procedures. a. Please note: All window shades procured as part of this project must not contain chemical flame retardants.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.

2.3 MANUALLY OPERATED SHAD ES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: Wi th continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer' s standard for balancing roller shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.
a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg) or for shades as recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.

B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or ex truded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 699

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 4
shadebands indicated without deflection. Pr ovide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: Ri ght side of inside face of shade.

2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.

3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

E. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric and Light-blocking fabric.

2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion t hat conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

3. Recessed Shade Pocket: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure designed for recessed ceiling installation; with front, top, and back formed as one piece, end plates, and removable bottom closure panel.
a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.
b. Provide pocket with lip at lower edge to support acoustical ceiling panel.

4. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip without fasteners.
a. Closure-Panel Width: 2 inches.

5. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. a. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.

2. Type: 100% Thermoplastic Olefin (TPO).
a. Basis of Design: EcoVeil Sheer by Mechoshade.
1) 68500 Series (1% Open)
2) Finishes as indicated on drawings.

3. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.

4. Openness Factor: 3 percent.

5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 700

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 5

2.5 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller s hades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands wi thout battens or seams to extent possible except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operat ional clearances,and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate sm oothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain condition s, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades ar e without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades t hat cannot be repaired, in a m anner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 701

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 1
SECTION 12 3600

COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 22 4100 "Residential Plumbing Fi xtures" for non-integral sinks and plumbing fittings.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

3. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

4. Chain-of-Custody Qualification Data: For manufacturer and vendor.

7. Product Data: For interior components indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials listed in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

8. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: To encourage the use of building products that are working to minimize their environmental and health impacts, preference will be given to products with publicly available information:
a. Environmental product Declarations:
b. Material Ingredients –Documentation demo nstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show mate rials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints.

2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 702

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 2
E. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.

2. One full-size quartz agglomerate countert op, with front edge and backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in configuration specified.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For material countertop s to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufactu rer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

D. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is cert ified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver countertops only after casework and supports on which they will be installed have been completed in installation areas.

B. Store countertops in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

C. Keep finished surfaces of countertops cove red with protective covering during handling and installation.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 703

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 3

1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1. 01 8113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

2. 01 8116 “Low Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

B. Building Product Disclosure Requirements: Provide Building Product Disclosure documentation for products used in this section.

1. Environmental Product Declarations:

2. Material Ingredients Documentation demonstrat ing the chemical inve ntory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000ppm).

C. Low-emitting requirements – Interior Products

D. Additional Low-emitting requirements – Adhesives and Sealants:

1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

2. Show compliance with VOC limits as deta iled in Section 01 8116 “Low-Emitting Materials Restrictions”.

E. Low-emitting requirements – Composite Wood:

F. Certified Wood : Wood shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-00 and FSC STD-40-004.

G. Sustainability Requirements:

1. Provide products with the maximum amount possible of post-consumer and pre- consumer recycled content.

2. Provide products manufactured and extrac ted within 100 miles of the project site whenever possible.

2.2 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed on Finish Legend, or comparable products and price groups by one of the following:
a. Zodiac by E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company
b. Quartz by Caesarstone Quartz

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 704

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 4
c. Quartz by Cambria.

2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208. 2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

2. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI 208.2
a. Basis of Design: "Medite II," 3/4 inch thick, by SierraPine Composite Solutions, Roseville, CA.

3. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded

4. Hardwood Veneer Plywood: HPVA HP-1, Non- toxic, urea formaldeh yde free: with soy- based adhesive:
a. Basis of Design: Purebond by Columbia Forest Products Inc.

5. Fire Rated Plywood FR plywood at secure walls: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.

6. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1 1/8 inches and as indicated.

2.4 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to manuf acturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, chamfered at top.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.

3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick, material with front edge built up with same material.

D. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch-thick, material.

E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field.

1. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 36 inches long would result, unless unavoidable.

2. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 705

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 5
G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cut outs for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.

2. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for pl umbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesive: Product recommended by manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to receive countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsa tisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corn er blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smoo th, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing thro ugh subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.

Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints where indicated. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.

2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 706

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 6
F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing.

Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask ar eas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fi t items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required fo r clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 707

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-1
SECTION 21 00 00

FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Work included in 21 00 00 applies to Division 21, Fire Suppression work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make fire suppression systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.

1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Fire Suppression system for this project.

B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.

1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.

B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by AHJ.

C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.

1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 21, Fire Suppression Specifications. Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.

B. Reference Basis of Design narrative document.

C. Fire Suppression Design Criteria: Refer to individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for fire suppression system design criteria.

D. Fire Suppression Equipment: Refer to individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for fire suppression equipment requirements.

1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements applies to Division 21, Fire Suppression work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of fire protection systems for proposed project.

B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 708

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-2
C. Definitions:

1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.

3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete Item of work furnished.

4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted Item.

5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.

1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Content of Section applies to Division 21, Fire Suppression Contract Documents.

B. Related Work:

1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. Drawings
c. Addenda
d. Owner/Architect Agreement
e. Owner/Contractor Agreement
f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits

1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and those listed in this Section.

B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:

1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:

1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

3. AHRI - Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute

4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

5. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 709

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-3

6. ASCE-7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

7. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

8. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process

9. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

10. ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers

11. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering

12. ASTM - ASTM International

13. AWWA - American Water Works Association

14. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

15. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency

16. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories

17. FCC - Federal Communications Commission

18. FM - FM Global

19. FM Global - FM Global Approval Guide

20. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Official

21. ICC - International Code Council

22. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission

23. ICC-ESR - International Code Council Evaluation Service Reports

24. HI - Hydraulic Institute Standards

25. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

26. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society

27. NEC - National Electric Code

28. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

29. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
a. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems b. NFPA 25 - Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems
c. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
d. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

30. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association

31. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation

32. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

33. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.

34. TIMA - Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

35. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

D. See Division 21, Fire Suppression individual Sections for additional references.

1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as specific individual Division 21, Fire Suppression sections.

B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.

C. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.

D. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 710

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-4
one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section.

Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.

E. Submit shop drawings, calculations and product data sheets as one complete stand-alone package to AHJ, Owner's insurance underwriter and Engineer.

F. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

G. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings.

1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.

Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed Item. Highlight connections by/to other trades.

2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Reference Division 21, Fire Suppression specification Sections for specific Item required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.

3. Provide pump curves, operation characteristics, capacities, ambient noise criteria, etc. for equipment.

4. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with operating load and deflection. Indicate frame type where required. Submit manufacturer's product data.

5. See Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.

H. Maximum of two reviews provided of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to Contractor without review.

I. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.

J. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Division 01 and in Structural documents.

K. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 21, Fire Suppression coordination documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical and Division 28, Electronic Safety submittals.

L. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 711

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-5
M. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:

1. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional.

2. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals". For any product marked "or approved equivalent", a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.

N. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide coordinated Shop Drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, equipment and piping layout, pipe layout, hanger layout, sway brace layout, seismic restraints, sway brace calculations, drains, location of drain discharge, risers, valves, details, water test information, physical device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams.

Reference individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements.

2. Shop Drawings and hydraulics calculations, sway brace calculations, trapeze hanger calculations, and the like, to be prepared under the direct supervision and control of a Professional Engineer competent to do such work and licensed in the state of California.

Drawings and calculations to bear the seal and wet signature of the Professional Engineer.

3. Provide Shop Drawings which indicate information required by NFPA 13. Include room names and fire sprinkler occupancy hazard classifications.

4. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating information for Hydraulic Information Sign for each hydraulic remote area calculated.

5. Utilizing the Reflected Ceiling backgrounds, provide Shop Drawings illustrating locations of fire sprinklers and piping.

6. Utilizing the Structural backgrounds, provide Shop Drawings illustrating locations and types of hangers and sway braces.

7. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating each type of hanger, including fasteners to structure.

8. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating each type of branchline restraint and sway brace, including length of sway brace member, sway brace fittings, minimum and maximum angles from vertical of sway brace member, method of attachment to structure, size, length and embedment of attachment to structure and size and type of structural member to which sway brace will be attached. Number each type of restraint and sway brace.

Indicate on Drawings locations of each type of numbered restraint and sway brace.

9. Provide details for any hanger, attachment, or sway brace to be attached to any I-joist, structural insulated panels (SIPs), cross laminated timber, and similar engineered structural products according to the specifications of the engineered product manufacturer.

10. Provide Shop Drawings illustrating information for Sprinkler System General Information Sign.

11. Shop Drawings to include a cross-sectional view that shows the sprinkler heads and piping in relation to the building's architectural and structural information. View to be chosen based on a location that will display the most information.

12. When required, provide Coordination Drawings.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 712

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-6

13. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.

14. Provide details of hanger, sway bracing and branch line restraint attachments to structure and to piping. Include details on the size and load capacities of fasteners. Provide verification of the structural capacity to withstand seismic load.

15. Provide sway bracing calculations on drawings showing horizontal seismic design load and requirements, with indication of zone of influence for each bracing location.

16. Provide a schedule of sway bracing type, size, and design criteria, including length, angle from vertical, and load capacities.

17. Clearly indicate the elevation of the highest sprinkler in relation to the elevation of the flow test pressure gauge monitor hydrant.

18. Provide details of flexible sprinkler hose fitting per manufacturer's schedule of equivalent feet used in hydraulic calculations, showing device length, maximum number of 90- degree bends and expected radius of bends.

19. Provide a schedule of signage to be installed at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting.

20. On the drawings, provide a list of number, model, temperature, sprinkler Identification number, manufacturer, orifice, deflector type, thermal sensitivity and pressure rating, quantity of each type to be contained in the spare sprinkler cabinet and the issue date or revision date of the list.

21. Spare sprinkler head cabinet size indicating the number of spare sprinkler head to be contained therein.

O. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.

P. Resubmission Requirements:

1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide submittals as specified. The Engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Clearly indicate changes on Drawings and cloud changes in the submittals.

2. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or make "corrections as noted".

Q. Operation and Maintenance Manuals/Owner's Instructions:

1. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or Item requiring servicing.

Include valve charts. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
a. Include copies of certificates of code authority acceptance, code-required acceptance tests; test reports and certificates.
b. Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Sections.
c. Catalog description of each Item of equipment actually installed on job. d. Instructions for operation and maintenance of fire suppression systems composed of operating instructions, maintenance instructions and manufacturer's literature as follows:
1) Testing and Maintenance Schedule Chart: Provide an 8-1/2- by 11-inch typewritten list of each item of installed equipment requiring testing inspection, lubrication or service, describing and scheduling performance of maintenance.
2) Manufacturer's Literature: Provide copies of manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance of fire suppression equipment, including replacement parts list with name and address of nearest distributor. Mark October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 713

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-7
each copy with equipment identification label as listed in equipment schedule, i.e. F-5 etc.
e. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. f. Include Record Drawings.
g. Include copy of water supply flow test used as basis for hydraulic calculations. h. Include hydraulic calculations and sway brace calculations. i. Include Contractor’s Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping. j. Include a copy of NFPA 25.
k. Include a copy of valve charts and whether normally open or normally closed. l. Include a copy of drain, auxiliary, and low point drains charts. m. Include a copy of the list to be included in the spare sprinkler head box. n. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
o. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, and quantities relevant to each piece of equipment: i.e. belts, motors, lubricants, and filters. p. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies.
q. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. r. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

2. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements, Article titled "Demonstration".

3. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

R. Record Drawings:

1. Maintain at site at least one set of Drawings for recording “As-constructed” conditions.

Indicate on Drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and location of concealed mechanical Item. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.

2. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.

3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD Files and drawings upon substantial completion.

4. Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for water services and drainage piping below grade extending to 5-feet outside building line.

5. Record Drawings to include site information or reference site information for complete understanding of the fire protection system between the building and the point of connection to the water supply and location of flow test pressure hydrants.

6. See Division 21, Fire Suppression individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.

S. Calculations: Submit hydraulic and sway brace and the like calculations.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 714

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-8

1. Hydraulic Calculations:
a. Include friction losses between the hydraulically most remote design area and the hydrant flow test pressure hydrant.
b. Hydraulic calculations to be performed on a nationally recognized fire sprinkler hydraulic calculation computer program, with cover sheets in the format required by the latest edition of NFPA 13. Hydraulic calculations performed “by hand” or not on a nationally recognized fire sprinkler hydraulic calculations computer program will be returned without review by Engineer.
c. Provide one or more hydraulic calculations for each hydraulically most remote area.
d. Where it is not obvious which area is most hydraulically remote, perform and submit for review additional hydraulic calculations proving the hydraulically most remote area.
e. For grid systems, either provide “peaked” hydraulic calculations, or provide two additional sets of hydraulic calculations for each hydraulically most remote area. f. Include pressure losses between the highest sprinkler and the elevation of the pressure gauge monitor hydrant of the flow test.
g. Include friction loss for flexible branch line connectors per manufacturer's schedule of equivalent feet for device length, maximum number of bends and expected radius of bends.
h. When flexible sprinkler hose fittings are added to an existing system, provide hydraulic calculations verifying the design flow rate will be achieved." i. For Future Tenant Improvement Spaces: Include in hydraulic calculations friction loss allowances for future installation of flexible sprinkler head connectors so that flexible connectors may be installed in the future without revisions to the overhead system.

2. Sway Brace Calculations:
a. Sway brace calculations utilizing a proprietary computer calculation program only used for the sway brace components supported by that manufacturer. For example, only “manufacturer X” sway brace components, and not those of another manufacturer, may be calculated on a "manufacturer X” sway brace computer calculation program.
b. Provide seismic calculations for any sway brace to be attached to any I-joist, structural insulated panels (SIPs), cross laminated timber, and similar engineered structural products according to the specifications of the I-joist manufacturer.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.

C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every Item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 715

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-9
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.

E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

F. Provide products that are UL listed.

G. Piping Insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all insulating materials.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, fire alarm, plumbing, cable trays, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet. Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, electrical, fire alarm ceiling suspension and tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling and finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.

B. Prepare Drawings as follows:

1. Provide drawings in CAD Format. CAD format release equal to design documents.

Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.

2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.

3. Indicate fire protection system piping including fittings, hangers, access panels, valves, and bottom of pipe elevations above finished floor.

4. Indicate inverts and provision for piping that must be graded to have right-of-way over more flexible Item. Drawings also to indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout as shown on electrical drawings, architectural reflected ceiling drawings and HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping. Drawings to indicate proposed and identified structural members to which hangers and sway braces will be attached as shown on structural drawings.

5. Incorporate Addenda Item and change orders.

6. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.

C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise AArchitect of conflict.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 716

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-10
D. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.

E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to sprinkler heads, pipe, fittings, hangers and bracing materials.

2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL, ETL, FM, ICC-ES, and CSFM listed and labeled for their intended fire protection function or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.

B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.

2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Install equipment requiring access (i.e. drains, control operators, valves, motors, engines, pumps, controllers, air compressors, gauges, fill cups, tanks, cleanouts and the like) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.

C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.

Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing, and coordination with other trades and disciplines.

D. Firestopping:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 717

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-11

1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM International E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

E. Pipe Installation:

1. Provide installation of piping systems coordinated to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials and building as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building with Project Structural Engineer. Verify construction phasing, type of building construction products and rating coordinating installation of piping systems.

2. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping.

F. Plenums: Provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums.

Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Provide fire suppression equipment and piping, both hanging and base mounted, with mounting connection points of sufficient strength to resist lateral seismic forces equal to lateral seismic forces as determined by building code and NFPA 13 calculations, whichever is more demanding.

C. See Structural Drawings for seismic design criteria for sway bracing and seismic restraint.

D. Earthquake resistant designs for Fire Protection (Division 21) equipment and distribution, i.e. fire sprinkler systems, fire standpipe systems, fire pumps, fire pump controllers, fire tanks, clean agent fire suppression systems, etc. to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.

E. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.

F. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for piping, equipment, tanks, pumps controllers and the like. Submit shop drawings along with equipment submittals.

G. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Engineer of seismic flexible joints for piping and crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit Shop Drawings along with seismic bracing details.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 718

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-12
H. Provide details of flexible drops for sprinklers in conformance with Building Code and ASCE-7 requirements of ceilings. Coordinate with Architectural and Structural Drawings and Specifications.

I. Piping: Per NFPA 13, ASCE-7 and local requirements.

J. Equipment:

1. Per "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" latest edition published by SMACNA, ASCE 7 and local requirements.

2. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of fire protection equipment during an earthquake.

3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

1. Prior to covering walls.

2. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

3. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

4. When mains or branchlines are to be permanently concealed by construction or insulation systems.

5. When fire suppression systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

C. Bear responsibility and cost to make piping accessible, to expose concealed lines, or to demonstrate acceptability of the system. If Contractor fails to notify Architect at times prescribed above, costs incurred by removal of such work are the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, while existing structure is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed.

2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every Item is thoroughly prepared.

Install new piping, and wiring to point of connection.

3. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference at a minimum. If overtime is required, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work.

4. During entire time system, or part thereof, is not operational, provide a firewatch per Fire Code, including a watchperson whose sole duty is to watch for and report fires.

5. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 719

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-13

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. Cutting and patching performed under Division 21, Fire Suppression includes, but is not limited to:
a. Cutting and patching of plaster or partitions.
b. Cutting and patching of finished ceilings.

2. Perform cutting and patching by skilled craftsmen in trade of work to be performed. Fill holes which are cut oversized for completed work. Match refinished areas with existing adjacent finish in a manner acceptable to Architect.

3. When masonry to concrete construction must be penetrated, provide a steel pipe sleeve in opening and grout in place in a neat manner. Leave grout surface to match existing finish. Provide escutcheons. If sleeves are not provided, core drill penetrations.

4. Locate concealed utilities to eliminate possible service interruption or damage.

5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

6. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).

7. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftspeople of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

8. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.

Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.

9. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, landscaping, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.

10. Repair mutilation of building around pipes, equipment, hangers, and braces.

3.6 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing at no additional cost to Owner.

3.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage and deterioration.

Store materials in original containers which identify manufacturer, name, brand and model numbers on site inside building or protected from weather, sun, dirt and October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 720

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-14
construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.

2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs.

Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

3. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items until in service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required.

Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.

D. Prior to acceptance of work and during time designated by Architect, provide necessary qualified personnel to operate system for a period of two hours.

E. Instruct the Owner in the operation of the sprinkler system, including main valve position (open or closed) recognition, system drainage, system testing, dry pipe valve reset and the relation to the fire alarm system.

F. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems to demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative and Architect that equipment is furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications.

3.9 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Upon completion of installation, except for sprinklers, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

C. Sprinklers may not be cleaned except for vacuuming in a manner in which no part of the sprinkler is touched by the vacuuming equipment. Replace sprinklers which bear traces of foreign substances with sprinklers of same model, temperature, K-factor, orifice, finish, style, orientation, and the like.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 721

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-15

3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Start-up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, in the presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. Provide pump impellers to obtain Basis of Design design capacities.

D. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment and piping.

3.11 PAINTING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections and the following:

1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of fire protection work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e., hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.

2. After acceptance by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), in a mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, machinery and equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.

3. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

4. Piping: Clean, primer coat and paint exposed piping on roof or at other exterior locations with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces and exterior exposures. Color selected by Architect.

5. Covers: Covers such as vault covers and the like will be furnished with finishes which resist corrosion and rust.

3.12 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm Demolition requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Sections in Division 21, Fire Suppression and the following:

1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to fire protection system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged Item with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 722

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-16

2. Equipment and Piping: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, piping, or fittings being removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other Item not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner.

3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused piping to behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap piping and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish.

4. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment, fittings, rough-ins, and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).

5. Coordinate demolition of existing fire suppression systems with Contractor. Where applicable or possible, portions of fire suppression demolition work may be performed by Contractor. Verify with local AHJ as to limitations of demolition by others and not fire suppression trades. Coordinate extent of demolition of fire suppression work to be done by others and supervise this work. No extra costs will be approved by replacement of systems due to improper or excessive demolition.

3.13 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Sections in Division 21, Fire Suppression. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:

1. Testing reports including Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping, Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Private Fire Service Mains, Fire pump acceptance test data report, and the like.

2. Cleaning

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

4. Training of Operating Personnel

5. Record Drawings

6. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates

7. Start-up/Test Document and Commissioning Reports

8. Letter of Conformance

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and individual Division 21, Fire Suppression Sections.

B. Upon completion of installation of equipment, sprinklers, hose valves and piping and after units are water pressurized, test system to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.

When possible, correct malfunctioning items at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new Item and proceed with retesting.

C. Inspect each installed Item for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original, except fire sprinklers, at site; otherwise, remove Item and replace with new Item. Feasibility and match to be judged by Architect. Remove cracked or dented Item and replace with new Item.

D. Fire sprinklers may not be reused, or cleaned, except for dusting. Replace damaged, field painted, oversprayed, overcoated or field coated sprinklers with new sprinklers of same manufacturer, model, finish, K-factor and performance characteristics. Where identical October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 723

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 21 00 00-17
replacement sprinklers are not available, provide sprinklers of similar finish, style, K-factor and performance characteristics.

3.15 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance and copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that fire suppression items were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals.

B. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.16 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS
A. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize fire protection equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is affected.

3.17 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING
A. Prior to connection of piping to existing piping or utilities, field verify existing conditions and exact sizes and locations of existing piping.

B. Provide additional offsets, transitions, joints, cut-ins, and replace portions of existing as required to facilitate connections of new.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 724

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-1
SECTION 21 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings

2. Wall and Floor Penetrations and Sleeves

3. Hangers and Supports

4. Struts and Strut Clamps

5. Sway Braces and Restraints

6. Anchors and Attachments

7. Valves

8. Signs

9. Drains

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 21, Fire Suppression and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1. Division 22, Plumbing

2. Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

3. Division 26, Electrical

4. Division 28, Electronic Safety

5. Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements

6. Section 21 13 00, Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Meet requirements of ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, by American Society of Civil Engineers, latest adopted edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Material and Equipment: Listed for its intended fire protection use in current UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory, or UL Online Certifications Directory for Fire Protection, FM Global Approval Guide, and International Code Council Evaluation Service Reports.

All material and equipment to be new and from a current manufacturer.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 725

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-2

2. Provide per AHJ requirements.

3. References to product Specifications for materials are listed according to accepted ANSI, ASTM, ASME, AWWA and other base standards. Materials to meet latest approved versions of these standards.

4. Fire Suppression Screw-Thread Connections: Comply with local fire department/fire marshal regulations for sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to fire department connections.

5. Manufacturers: Unless an item is marked "No substitutions", submit substitution request for materials of other than named manufacturers.

6. Noise and Vibration:
a. Install vibration isolators and measures required to prevent noise and vibration from being transmitted to occupied areas. Select equipment to operate within noise coefficient (NC) design level for particular type of installation in relation to its location.
b. After installation, make proper adjustments to reduce noise and vibration to acceptable levels as defined by Architect.
c. In acoustically sensitive areas, design system in a manner that minimizes the number of wall penetrations.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 FLOW TEST
A. Provide materials and labor for a new water supply test on the closest nearby fire hydrants per NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Base hydraulic calculations on new flow test.

1.8 SYSTEM IMPAIRMENT
A. When returning a water-based fire protection system to service after impairment or control valve closure, verify the system is in working order by performing a main drain test per NFPA 25.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings:

1. Pipe:
a. Bull Moose Tube
b. Wheatland Tube Co.
c. Youngstown Tube Co.
d. Tex-Tube Co.
e. State Pipe and Supply, Inc.
f. Or approved equivalent

2. Fittings, Mechanical and Grooved Couplings:
a. Victaulic
b. Gruvlok
c. Shurjoint Piping Products Inc.
d. Smith-Cooper International
e. Tyco Fire & Building Products
f. Viking Corp.
g. ARGCO
h. Anvil International
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 726

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-3
i. Dixon Valve & Coupling
j. Or approved equivalent.

3. Fittings, Threaded:
a. Ward Mfg.
b. Anvil International
c. Smith-Cooper International
d. Aegis Technologies
e. Or approved equivalent.

4. Fittings, Rubber Gasketed:
a. Victaulic
b. Anvil International
c. AnvilStar
d. EBAA Iron, Inc.
e. Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.
f. Smith-Cooper International
g. Tyco Fire & Building Products
h. Viking Corp.
i. Ward Mfg.
j. ARGCO
k. Dixon Valve & Coupling
l. Or approved equivalent.

5. Fittings, Welded:
a. Anvil International
b. Shurjoint Piping Products Inc.
c. Smith-Cooper International
d. State Pipe & Supply, Inc.
e. Or approved equivalent.

6. Fittings, Flanged:
a. Victaulic
b. United Brand Fittings
c. U.S. Pipe
d. Anvil S.P.F.
e. Iowa Fittings Co.
f. Tyco Fire Products
g. Or approved equivalent.

B. Wall and Floor Penetrations and Sleeves:

1. ARGCO

2. Fire Protection Products Inc. (FPPI)

3. Or approved equivalent.

C. Hangers and Supports:

1. Cooper B-Line Tolco

2. Anvil International

3. ITW Buildex Sammys

4. Erico International

5. PHD Mfg. Inc.

6. Or approved equivalent.

D. Struts and Strut Clamps:

1. Cooper B-Line Tolco

2. Or approved equivalent.

E. Sway Braces and Restraints:

1. Cooper B-Line Tolco

2. Anvil International
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 727

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-4

3. Erico International

4. PHD Mfg. Inc.

5. Or approved equivalent.

F. Anchors and Attachments:

1. Attachments in concrete as specified or described by structural. If not specified or described by structural, then as follows:
a. Hilti
b. Powers
c. Simpson Strong-Tie
d. DeWalt
e. Or approved equivalent.

2. Wood:
a. Cooper B-Line Tolco
b. Anvil International
c. Elco Construction Products
d. Erico International
e. ITW Buildex Sammys
f. Or approved equivalent.

3. Steel:
a. Cooper B-Line Tolco
b. Anvil International
c. Elco Construction Products
d. Erico International
e. ITW Buildex Sammys
f. Or approved equivalent.

G. Valves:

1. Butterfly Valves:
a. Victaulic
b. Nibco
c. Tyco
d. Use lug body next to pumps; Nibco.
e. Reliable
f. Or approved equivalent.

2. Automatic Air Release Valve:
a. Potter Electric Signal Co.
b. Or approved equivalent.

3. Ball Valve:
a. Victaulic
b. Apollo Valves
c. Fire Protection Products Inc. (FPPI)
d. Nibco
e. Or approved equivalent.

H. Signs:

1. Tyco Fire Products

2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler

3. Viking Corp.

4. ARGCO

5. Or approved equivalent.

I. Drains:

1. Reference Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings.

2. AGF

3. Victaulic
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 728

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-5

4. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 ABOVEGROUND BLACK STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Wet Pipe Systems:

1. Pipe Size 2-inch Diameter and Smaller: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795; minimum of Schedule 40 when installed with threaded fittings, minimum Schedule 10 when installed with grooved fittings.

2. Pipe Size 2-1/2-inch Diameter and Larger: ASTM A53, ASTM A135, or ASTM A795; minimum of Schedule 10.

3. Exposed pipe 8-feet or less above finished floor: A minimum of Schedule 40.

B. Joints:

1. Threaded, flanged or bevel welded.

2. Piping installed in plenums or shafts to have welded joints.

C. Fittings:

1. Threaded:
a. Malleable Iron: Class 150 and Class 300, ANSI B16.3. b. Cast Iron: Class 125 and 250, ANSI B16.3.

2. Flanged:
a. Cast iron; Class 125 and 250, ASME B16.1.
b. Raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

3. Welded:
a. Carbon Steel: Long radius, standard weight or extra strong. b. Factory Wrought Steel Buttweld Fittings: ASME B16.9. c. Buttwelding Ends for Pipe, Valves, Flanges and Fittings: ASME B16.25. d. Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures: ASTM A234.
e. Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. f. Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welded and Threaded: ASME B16.11.

4. Mechanical Fittings and Grooved Couplings:
a. Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, ASTM A536 ductile iron or ASTM A47 malleable iron, with enamel finish and grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved couplings. Synthetic-rubber gasket with central-cavity, pressure-responsive design and ASTM A183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts.
b. FM Global approved.

D. Anti-Microbial Coating: Factory-applied coating to inhibit corrosion from microbiological organisms.

2.3 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
A. Below Grade and High Water Table Areas: Waterproof elastomeric compound.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping.

B. Hangers: Ferrous.

C. Hanger Rods: Zinc electroplated carbon steel.

D. Finishes: Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 729

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-6
E. Materials:

1. Use carbon steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

2. Use stainless steel hangers, rods and attachments for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries and the like.

2.5 STRUTS AND STRUT CLAMPS
A. Electro-galvanized steel.

B. Designed for supporting pipe runs from strut supports.

C. Stainless steel for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries and the like.

2.6 SWAY BRACES AND RESTRAINTS
A. Sway Bracing: From a single manufacturer and compatible with sway brace calculation program.

B. Stainless steel for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries, and the like.

2.7 ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. General: Anchor supports to masonry, concrete and block walls per anchoring system manufacturer’s recommendations, or as modified by project Structural Engineer.

B. Materials:

1. Ferrous.

2. Stainless steel for corrosive environment applications. Examples of corrosive environment applications include, but are not limited to: swimming pools and spas, pool and spa equipment rooms and adjacent areas, chemical rooms, kidney dialysis areas, marine and beach environments, commercial laundries, and the like.

C. Attachments in Concrete:

1. Suitable for hanging and bracing fire protection systems in concrete which is subject to cracking in a seismic event.

2. Seismic Design Areas C, D, E and F:
a. Compatible with International Code Council Evaluation Service Acceptance Criteria AC-193 and AC308 for expansion, screw and adhesive anchors. Meet requirements of ACI 355.2, Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary.
b. All models of Hilti HDI and ITW Red Head Multi-Set II anchors are not approved for attaching fire protection systems in Seismic Design Areas C, D, E and F. No Exceptions.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 730

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-7
D. ITW Buildex Sammys with FM Approval only are not allowed in certain seismic zones. Verify with FM that FM Approval is effective in project’s seismic zone.

2.8 VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body with factory-installed tamper switches. Use lug body next to pumps.

B. Automatic Air-Release Valve for Wet Systems:

1. Rated to 175 psi.

2. Automatic float-type with shutoff mounted in a water retention pan.

3. Single set 24VAC@2A for electronic supervision.

4. Ball valve switch with cover tamper.

C. Ball Valves: Brass body, brass stem; forged brass ball disc.

2.9 SIGNS
A. Engraved plastic laminate or corrosion resistant metal sign or plastic equipment marker.

B. Corrosion-resistant chain or permanent adhesive.

2.10 DRAINS
A. Reference Aboveground Black Steel Pipe and Fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install in conformance with UL Listing, FM Approval or ICC-ES requirements and restrictions.

3.2 ABOVEGROUND BLACK STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping Routing:

1. Orient horizontal routes parallel with walls and beam lines.

2. Install piping as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations on Drawings or, if not indicated, install piping to provide the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building and its equipment.

3. Install piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. Prior to design and installation. obtain pre-approval by Architect for exposed piping.

4. In open-to-structure areas which are open to public view, route exposed piping to minimize visual impact. Obtain Architect's and Engineer's approval of exposed piping installation.

5. Coordinate installation with other trades. Route piping as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, HVAC piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts and similar work. Final location of lighting will have priority over final sprinkler locations. Provide drains to trapped sections of system which result from such routing. Other trades take precedence for installation space.

6. Support piping adjacent to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of the building. Limit clearance to 2-inches wherever furring is indicated for concealment of piping. Allow for insulation thickness. Locate insulated piping to provide minimum 1-inch clearance outside insulation.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 731

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-8

7. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating within column or beam enclosures, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal routes in solid partitions, except where approved.

8. General Electrical Equipment Clearances: Do not route piping through electrical rooms, transformer vaults, elevator equipment rooms and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Do not route piping above electric power or lighting panel, switchgear, low voltage panel, or similar electric device.

9. Rooms Protected by Alternative Systems: Route water filled and dry system piping around rooms protected by pre-action systems, clean agent systems, gaseous suppression systems and other alternative fire suppression systems.

10. Install pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.

11. Pitch all dry and pre-action system piping 1/4-inch per 10-feet for mains and 1/2-inch per 10-feet for branch lines, including pipe passing through both warm and cold areas.

B. Couplings:

1. Install where indicated on Drawings and on each side of pieces of equipment to permit easy removal of equipment.

2. Deburr cut edges.

C. Pipe Penetrations: Wire pipe cutout coupon at point of pipe penetration.

D. Pipe and Pipe Fittings:

1. Expansion and Flexibility: Install work with due regard for expansion and contraction to prevent damage to the piping, equipment, building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, approved type expansion joints, sway bracing, wire restraints, vertical restraints, flexible couplings or other means to control pipe movement and to minimize pipe forces.

2. Coordinate support of pipe 4-inches and larger with Structural Engineer.

3. Provide clearances around piping per NFPA 13.

4. Install dry and pre-action welded pipe with welds facing vertically up, or where this is not possible, as close as possible to vertical between 46 degrees and 234 degrees. Intent is to minimize corrosion caused by moisture in the bottom of pipes.

3.3 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVES
A. Escutcheons: Install on exposed pipes passing through walls or floors.

1. Pipe Sleeves: Lay out work in advance of pouring concrete and furnish and set sleeves necessary to complete work.

2. Floor Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Extend sleeve 1-inch above finished floor. Caulk pipes passing through floor with nonshrinking fire and water resistant grout or approved equivalent caulking compound. Caulk/seal piping penetrations through fire rated building walls and floors with listed, fire-rated assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements.

3. Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction. Provide sleeve flush with finished face of wall. Caulk pipes passing through walls with non-shrinking caulking compound. Caulk/seal piping penetrations through fire rated building walls and floors with listed, fire-rated assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements.

4. Beam Sleeves:
a. Coordinate with trades for locations of pipe sleeves in reinforced concrete and steel beams. Penetrations must be indicated on structural shop drawings. See Drawings and Specifications for specific sleeve location limitations. Pipe sleeve locations must be indicated on reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawings. b. Field cutting of beams not allowed without written approval of structural engineer.

No extra costs allowed for failure to coordinate beam penetrations prior to reinforced concrete and steel beam shop drawing submittal.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 732

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-9

5. Penetrations in Fire-Rated Wall/Floor Assemblies:
a. Reference Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. b. Coordinate with Drawings location of fire rated walls, ceilings and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping and equipment with approved firestopping material.
c. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to accommodate the penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe passing through to meet the requirements of ASTM E814 and NFPA. d. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports to conform to NFPA 13.

B. Provide adjustable hangers, inserts, brackets, clamps, supplementary steel and other accessory materials required for proper support of pipe lines and equipment. Provide supplementary materials for proper support and attachment of hangers.

3.5 STRUTS AND STRUT CLAMPS
A. Install per manufacturer's listed orientation.

3.6 SWAY BRACES AND RESTRAINTS
A. Locate per orientation and spacing as required by sway brace calculations.

B. Attach sway bracing directly to pipe or equipment being braced.

C. Do not attach sway bracing to bottom of truss members.

3.7 ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. In post-tension construction, determine location of post-tension cables and install anchors to avoid contact or interference with post-tension cables. Coordinate with Structural.

B. Do not use powder-driven attachments.

C. Building Attachments and Inserts: Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves and flanges, for sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

D. Hanger and Support Attachments:

1. Concrete:
a. Where supports in slabs are required after concrete has been poured, provide drilled-in threaded inserts (mechanical-expansion anchors), installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Install mechanical-expansion anchors after concrete is completely cured and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Where anchors are to be installed in post-tension construction, determine and avoid locations of post-tension cables prior to drilling.

2. Metal Floor Deck: Support hangers per UL Listing or FM Approval for selected concrete insert before pouring of concrete topping, or from beam clamps fastened to structural steel.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 733

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00-10

3. Steel Joists: Support hangers from beam clamps fastened to bar joists or to auxiliary steel between bar joists as required.

4. C-Clamp Hangers: Do not attach to one side of double-angle bottom members.

5. Locate and install hangers, supports and attachments connecting to I-joists, structural insulated panels (SIPs), cross laminated timber and similar engineered structural products according to the structural product manufacturer specifications.

E. Make available to the Architect information required to verify the anchorage, sway bracing and restraint of fire protection systems.

3.8 VALVES
A. Inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace valve if leak persists.

B. Install valves where required for proper operation, testing and drainage. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. Install conveniently and accessibly located with reference to finished building for repairs, removal and service.

3.9 SIGNS
A. General Information Signs: Provide a general information sign used to determine system design basis and information relevant to the inspection, testing and maintenance requirements required by NFPA 25, Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems. Such general information is to be provided with a permanently marked weatherproof metal or rigid plastic sign, secured with corrosion-resistant wire, chain, or other acceptable means. Such signs are to be placed at each system control rise loop and auxiliary system control valve.

B. The sign is to include the following information:

1. Name and Location of the Facility Protected

2. Presence of High-Piled and/or Rack Storage

3. Maximum Height of Storage Planned

4. Flow Test Data

5. Location of Auxiliary Drains and Low Point Drains

6. Original Results of Main Drain Flow Test

7. Name of Installing Contractor or Designer

8. Indication of presence and location of other auxiliary systems.

3.10 DRAINS
A. Locate drain connections within 7-feet of floor. Provide piping capable of being fully drained.

B. Provide a drain vent at top of vertical drains. Coordinate with Division 22, Plumbing.

C. Coordinate location of auxiliary drains with Architect. Architect to approve location before drain is installed.

D. Protect drains from tampering and accidental operation.

E. Protect drain discharge at the exterior with a turned-down 45 degree elbow.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 734

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-1
SECTION 21 13 00

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Sprinklers

2. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fitting Assembly - For fire sprinklers in suspended ceilings which are supplied by a wet pipe system.

3. Wet System Air Vent

4. Spare Sprinkler Cabinet
B. This is a contractor designed system. Contact AHJ prior to bid to verify fire system requirements. Provide design compliant with codes as interpreted by AHJ.

C. Scope: Revision and extension of existing system to new and remodeled areas.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 21, Fire Suppression and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1. Division 22, Plumbing

2. Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning

3. Division 26, Electrical

4. Division 28, Electronic Safety

5. Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements

6. Section 21 05 00, Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Hydraulic calculations.

2. Sway brace calculations.

3. Details of sway bracing.

4. Details of interval and end of branch line restraints.

5. Details of flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly, including number and radius of bends, corresponding to equivalent feet used in hydraulic calculations. Provide details of sign to be installed at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly.

6. Details of oversized ceiling penetrations and oversized sprinkler escutcheons.

7. Trapeze hanger details and calculations, including size, length and material. Additionally, provide size, weight and number of pipes to be carried on the trapeze.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 735

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-2

8. On submittal and As-Built drawings, provide text of sprinkler list to be installed in the spare sprinkler cabinet.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 21 00 00, Fire Suppression Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide coverage for entire building. Field verify field conditions prior to submittal of bid. Adjust bid to provide protection features in accordance with applicable codes and interpretations by AHJ. Provide design and installation based on more stringent requirements if this specification and AHJ requirements differ from Code.

B. Design Parameters:

1. Building Areas: Seating and Collaboration Zone.
a. Occupancy Classification: Light.

2. Building Areas: Prject Work Area, Craft Storage, 3D Printing, and similar. a. Occupancy Classification: Ordinary Group 1.

3. Design parameters above are NFPA 13 minimums. Provide increased design densities, design areas and hose allowances to meet requirements of AHJ.

C. Sprinkler system design to include a 10 percent pressure and flow cushion between system demand point and available water supplies.

D. Extend hydraulic calculations from hydraulically most remote design area back to location of pressure hydrant of flow test or effective point of water supply where characteristics of water supply are known.

1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra sprinklers per code.

B. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type and metal storage cabinet in riser room.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sprinklers:

1. Finished Areas:
a. Victaulic
b. Viking
c. Tyco
d. Reliable
e. Globe
f. Senju
g. Or approved equivalent.

2. Nonfinished Areas:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 736

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-3
a. Victaulic
b. Viking
c. Tyco
d. Reliable
e. Globe
f. Or approved equivalent.

B. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fitting Assembly:

1. Victaulic; VicFlex.

2. Flexhead Industries

3. SprinkFLEX

4. ARGCO

5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Company

6. Tyco Fire and Building Products

7. Viking Corporation

8. Or approved equivalent.

C. Wet System Air Vent:

1. Engineered Corrosion Solutions (ECS)

2. Potter Electric Signal Company; Model PAV

3. Or approved equivalent.

D. Spare Sprinkler Cabinet:

1. Victaulic

2. Fire Protection Products, Inc. (FPPI).

3. Tyco Fire & Building Products

4. Allied Rubber and Gasket Co.

5. Potter Roemer Fire Pro.

6. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 SPRINKLERS
A. Finished Areas:

1. Type: Glass-Bulb

2. Style: Recessed

3. Response: Quick-Response

4. Finish: White Polyester

5. Escutcheon: White Polyester
B. Nonfinished Areas:

1. Type: Glass-Bulb

2. Response: Quick-Response

3. Finish: Brass

2.3 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTING ASSEMBLY
A. Fully welded non-mechanical fittings, stainless steel, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1-inch true-bore internal corrugated hose diameter. 175 psi.

B. Ceiling Bracket: Galvanized steel, direct attachment type, with integrated snap-on clip ends and removable flexible hose attachment with set screw. FM1637, UL 2443.

C. Affix permanent sign, label or decal at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly anchoring component limiting the relocation of the sprinkler.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 737

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-4

2.4 WET SYSTEM AIR VENT
A. Brass, UL 2573 with ball valve supervisory switch.

2.5 SPARE SPRINKLER CABINET
A. NFPA 13 Systems: Sized to accommodate a minimum of two spare sprinklers of each Sprinkler Identification Number (SIN), manufacturer, model, orifice, deflector type, temperature and thermal sensitivity, or a minimum of six sprinklers for facilities having under 300 sprinklers, or a minimum of 12 sprinklers for facilities having 300 to 1000 sprinklers, or a minimum of 24 sprinklers for facilities having over 1000 sprinklers, whichever is more.

B. Welded steel with hinged steel cover.

C. Red enamel or polyester coated finish inside and out.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install per manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.

3.2 SPRINKLERS
A. Center sprinklers in center or quarter points of suspended ceiling tile.

B. Align sprinklers with architectural column lines, lighting, diffusers and other ceiling features. In unfinished ceilings, route piping to minimize visual impact. Sprinklers and piping not so aligned are to be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner.

3.3 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTING ASSEMBLY
A. Install flexible sprinkler hose fitting assemblies where pendent sprinkler heads are located in acoustic ceiling tiles.

B. Install with no more bends than are included in equivalent footage used in hydraulic calculations.

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended bending radius as included in equivalent footage used in hydraulic calculations.

D. Affix permanent sign, label or decal at each flexible sprinkler hose fitting assembly anchoring component limiting the relocation of the sprinkler.

3.4 WET SYSTEM AIR VENT
A. Locate at a point in the system that will vent the most air.

B. Connect at top of pipe.

C. Locate so as not to interfere with sprinkler spray pattern.

D. Locate where it can be easily accessed for inspection and cleaning.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 738

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00-5
E. Pipe output of air vent to drain with an indirect connector or to exterior where it will not cause damage.

3.5 SPARE SPRINKLER CABINET
A. Attach to wall at the main sprinkler system riser.

B. Locate so cover is easy to open and readily accessible.

C. Locate in an area with a temperature between 40 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Locate sprinkler wrenches inside cabinet.

E. Inside the cabinet, provide a list of sprinklers installed in the property, including sprinkler identification number, manufacturer, model, orifice, deflector type, thermal sensitivity and pressure rating, quantity of each type to be contained in the cabinet and issue or revision date of the list.

San Carlos City CouncilJanuary 12, 2026

San Carlos City Council
January 12, 2026